Lexus - SC 430 - Owners Manual - 2003 - 2003

FOREWORD Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all the know–how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality. This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that you can enjoy many years of safe motoring. When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction. Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require. If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number: U.S. OWNERS
When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada: Lexus Roadside Assistance 1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free) (1–800–255–3987)
HAWAII: Lexus Customer Service Assistance 1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free) (1–800–255–3987) CANADIAN OWNERS
When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland: Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service 1–800–26–LEXUS (Toll–Free) (1–800–265–3987) Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also. All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. i 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) INTRODUCTION New vehicle warranty Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited warranties:
New vehicle warranty
Emission control systems warranty This vehicle should not be modified with non–genuine Lexus products. Modification with non–genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Others Spark ignition system of your Lexus For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”. The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference–Causing Equipment Standard. Your responsibility for maintenance It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus A wide variety of non–genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle. Installation of a mobile two–way radio system As the installation of a mobile two–way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti–lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation. Scrapping of your Lexus The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle. ii 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please read this page and the rest of the Owner’s Manual carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation of your vehicle. SECTION 2 – AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are explained in detail. Be sure to read this section so that you can make full use of them. SECTION 3 – STARTING AND DRIVING TABLE OF CONTENTS Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything in this section, and remember – drive safely! The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy reference to the appropriate pages. SECTION 4 – IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving. Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily understandable way for quick reference. This section explains what to do in the event of an urgent situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire, etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given. SECTION 1 – INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE BASIC OPERATION – QUICK REFERENCE The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 7 groups listed below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points you should pay particular attention to. This section explains the importance of regular maintenance. Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition. 1. Keys and doors SECTION 6 – SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS 2. Switches 4. Interior equipment Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection and maintenance yourself. 5. Exterior equipment INDEX 6. Comfort adjustment The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are searching for. 3. Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators 7. Theft deterrent iii 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GAS STATION INFORMATION Safety and vehicle damage warnings The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at the gas station is provided here. In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings. These are used in the following ways: QUICK INDEX This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed information when an urgent situation arises. Safety symbol CAUTION This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others. NOTICE This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment. In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through it. This means ”Do not”, ”Do not do this”, or ”Do not let this happen”. iv Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a considerable amount of information. To use this information most effectively, please take the time to familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the manual. PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT PANEL 00sa13c vi 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page 1 Driving position memory switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 16 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 2 Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 17 Audio door control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 3 Door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 18 Ashtray/Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 4 Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 19 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 5 Power rear view mirror control switch . . . . . . . . 101 20 Coin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 6 Headlight cleaner switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 21 Vehicle stability control system OFF switch . . . 210 7 Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 22 Coin box door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 8 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 23 Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 24 Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . 199 9 Headlight, turn signal and fog light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 24, 25 25 Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 10 Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 26 Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 11 Wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 27 Steering pad switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 12 Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 28 Hood opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 13 Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 42 29 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 204 14 Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 154 30 Trunk lid opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 15 Car audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 31 Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 32 Parking brake release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. vii 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles with compass sold in U.S.A.) 00sa01c viii 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page 1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 16 SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2 Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 17 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3 Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 18 Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 199 4 Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 205 19 Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 5 Automatic headlight leveling system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 20 Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 21 Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 6 Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 22 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 7 Vehicle stability control system warning light . . 47 23 Turn signal indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 8 Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 24 24 Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 9 Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 25 10 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Vehicle stability control system OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 26 Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 11 Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 27 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 12 Rear light failure warning light 28 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 13 Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 45 29 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 14 Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 30 Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 15 Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 43 31 ODO/TRIP, RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. ix 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles without compass sold in U.S.A.) 00sa15a x 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page 1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 15 SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2 Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 16 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3 Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 17 Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 199 4 Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 205 18 Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 5 Automatic headlight leveling system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 19 Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 20 Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 6 Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 21 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 7 Vehicle stability control system warning light . . 47 22 Turn signal indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 8 Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 24 23 Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 9 Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 24 10 Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Vehicle stability control system OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 25 Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 11 Rear light failure warning light 26 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 12 Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 45 27 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 13 Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 28 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 14 Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 43 29 Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 30 ODO/TRIP, RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. xi 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles with compass sold in Canada) 00sa14a xii 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page 1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 17 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 2 Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 18 Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 199 3 Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 19 Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 4 Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 205 20 Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 5 Automatic headlight leveling system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 21 Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 22 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 6 Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 23 Turn signal indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 7 Vehicle stability control system warning light . . 47 24 Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 8 Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 24 25 9 Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Vehicle stability control system OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 26 Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 10 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 27 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 11 Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 28 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 12 Rear light failure warning light 29 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 13 Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 45 30 Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 14 Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 31 ODO/TRIP, RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 15 Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 43 16 SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. xiii 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles without compass sold in Canada) 00sa02c xiv 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page 1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 16 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 2 Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 17 Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 199 3 Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 18 Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 4 Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 205 19 Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 5 Automatic headlight leveling system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 20 Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 21 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 6 Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 22 Turn signal indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 7 Vehicle stability control system warning light . . 47 23 Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 8 Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 24 24 9 Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Vehicle stability control system OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 25 Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 10 Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 26 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 11 Rear light failure warning light 27 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 12 Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 45 28 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 13 Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 29 Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 14 Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 43 30 ODO/TRIP, RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 15 SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. xv 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL Page 00sa12a 1 Tilt and telescopic steering adjustment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 2 Seat position, seat cushion angle and height control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96 3 Seatback angle control switch . . . 95 4 Lumbar support control switch . . 96 5 Seatback lock release lever . . . . . 97 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. xvi 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX EXTERIOR VIEW Page 00sa11 1 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 2 Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . 28 3 Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 4 Retractable hardtop . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 5 Wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . 26, 343 6 Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . . 100 7 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 8 Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 9 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 346 10 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. xvii 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) PICTORIAL INDEX xviii 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) BASIC OPERATION QUICK REFERENCE Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiper switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 3 4 5 1 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) QUICK REFERENCE 1. DRIVER’S SEAT 2. STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING WHEEL 00sa04a Seat adjustment Seat position Seat cushion angle Seat cushion height To tilt the steering wheel up or down to the desired angle, push the control switch in the required direction and release the button when the steering wheel reaches the desired angle.
TELESCOPIC STEERING WHEEL Seatback angle Lumbar support 00sa05a Head restraint height Head restraint angle 2 To move the steering wheel to the desired position, push the control switch away from you or pull it toward you until the steering wheel reaches the desired position. QUICK REFERENCE 3. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER 00sa09a SELECTOR LEVER POSITION P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position 00sa10a R: Reverse position N: Neutral position D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive possible) 4: Position for engine braking (Shifting into overdrive not possible)* 3, 2: Position for more powerful engine braking L: Position for maximum engine braking  Shift while pressing the brake pedal. (Ignition switch must be in the ”ON” position.) *When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from ”D” to ”4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 208. 3 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) QUICK REFERENCE 4. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT SWITCH With the ignition OFF Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. 00sa06b With the engine started and parking brake released Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. 00sa07b Headlights also turn on at full intensity. Headlights also turn on. Automatic light control 00sa08b Automatic light control With the ignition OFF or With the engine started and parking brake released High beam Headlight flasher 4 QUICK REFERENCE
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Right or left turn 5. WIPER SWITCH Mist wiper operation 00L103a Intermittent operation Lane change (Right or left) Low speed operation High speed operation Washer on 5 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) QUICK REFERENCE 6 SECTION 1–1 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Keys and doors Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Engine immobiliser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 7 KEYS AND DOORS KEYS 11sa10a The trunk lid can be opened using a loop of wire in the rear console box even with the trunk lid opener main switch in the glove box turned off. When keeping items in the trunk, be sure to turn off the trunk lid opener main switch and lock the glove box and rear console box. To turn off the main switch in the glove box, see page 86. For locking the glove box, see page 68. For locking the rear console box, see page 66. Since the doors can be locked without a key, you should always carry a spare master key in case you accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle. If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys, duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key number. 1 Master keys – These master keys work in every lock. For your Lexus dealer to make a new key with a built–in transponder chip, your dealer will need one of them. 2 Sub key – The sub key will not open the glove box and rear console box. 3 Key number plate – Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. A transponder chip for engine immobiliser system has been placed in the head of the master and sub keys. These chips are needed to enable the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine. To protect items locked in the glove box or rear console box when using valet parking, leave the sub key with the attendant. 8 We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place. KEYS AND DOORS Flat key Starting the engine using a flat key 11g039c 11sa05 As a transponder chip is built in its key case, you can start the engine with this key. The flat key works in every lock. A transponder chip for engine immobiliser system has been placed in the key case of the flat key. This chip is needed to enable the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose this key. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine. Insert your key plate in its key case as shown. We recommend that you always carry this with you for emergency use. Do not leave it in your vehicle. 1. Remove the key plate from the key case. 2. Insert the key plate into the ignition switch. The indicator light keeps flashing. 3. Bring the key case closer to the ignition switch within 10 seconds as indicated by the arrow head. The indicator light goes out. This means the engine immobiliser system is automatically canceled. (For details, see “Engine immobiliser system” on page 11.) You can put the key case away then. You cannot cancel the engine immobiliser system if 10 seconds have passed after you inserted the key plate. You need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the step 2. 4. Start the engine within 20 seconds after the security indicator light goes out. You cannot start the engine if 20 seconds have passed after the security indicator went off. You need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the step 2. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 9 KEYS AND DOORS NOTICE  Do not let the key case become bent as the key plate may fall out or become bent also.  The flat key is designed for emergency use only. So do not use it regularly instead of other master keys. 11L021-2 When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following precautions:  When starting the engine, do not use the key with a key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the key ring against the key grip. Doing so may prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to stop soon after it starts. 10 11R055  When starting the engine, do not use the key in proximity with other transponder keys (including the flat key and keys of other vehicles), and do not press other key plates against the key grip. Doing so may prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to stop soon after it starts. If this happens, remove the key once and then insert it again after removing other transponder keys (including the flat key and keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while gripping or covering them with your hand to start the engine. KEYS AND DOORS ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 11G035c 11sa04  Do not bend the key grip or flat key.  Do not cover the key grip or flat key with any material that cuts off electromagnetic waves.  Do not knock the key or flat key hard against other objects.  Do not leave the key or flat key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard and hood under direct sunlight.  Do not put the key or flat key in water or wash it in an ultrasonic washer.  Do not use the key or flat key with electromagnetic materials. The engine immobiliser system is a theft prevention system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the transponder chip in the key’s head transmits an electronic code to the vehicle. The engine will start only when the electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered ID code for the vehicle. The system is automatically set when the key is removed from the ignition switch. At this time, the security indicator light flashes. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the security indicator light goes out and the system is canceled automatically, which enables the engine to start. The transponder chip of the flat key is in its key case. You can cancel the engine immobiliser system using the flat key. (For details, see “Flat key” on page 9.) 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 11 KEYS AND DOORS For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with built–in transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and master key. However, there is a limit to the number of additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine. For vehicles sold in U.S.A. FCC ID: MOZRI–4ATY–A MADE IN JAPAN This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 12 For vehicles sold in Canada This device complies with RSS–210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. KEYS AND DOORS In the following cases, the battery in the key may be discharged. If this is the case, replace it using a special screwdriver. WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL*  The remote control does not work.  The operational range of wireless remote control becomes extremely short. 11sa09a  The indicator light on the key is dimmed or does not come on. For the replacement of the battery, see ”Replacing the battery” on page 17. You can also have the battery of the key replaced by your Lexus dealer. If you lose the wireless key, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident. 1 Locking the doors and sounding an alarm 2 Unlocking the doors and opening the side windows 3 Indicator light 4 Unlocking the trunk lid NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated as vehicle theft deterrent measure in case of the loss of the wireless remote control key. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. When you operate any button on the key, push it slowly and surely. At this time, the indicator light on the key grip flashes once. The operational range of the wireless remote control is approximately 1 m (3 ft.). The effective range may vary with different conditions. To activate the wireless remote control without fail, do it approximately 1 m (3 ft.) from your Lexus. You can use up to 4 wireless remote control keys for the same vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information. The wireless remote control key is an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause damage to the key.  Do not leave the wireless remote control key on places where the temperature becomes high such as on the dashboard.  Do not disassemble it.  Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.  Avoid putting it in water. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 13 KEYS AND DOORS Locking/Unlocking the doors When you push the ”LOCK” button on the key briefly, all the doors can be locked from outside the vehicle. When they are locked securely, the emergency flashers will flash and one beep will sound.* However, when you push the ”LOCK” button with any door not closed securely, the buzzer sounds for 10 seconds.** To stop the buzzer, close all the doors securely or push the ”UNLOCK” button. If the key is in the ignition switch, locking cannot be done. Make sure all the doors are locked when you leave the vehicle. Push the ”LOCK” button once again. If they were already locked, the turn signal lights will flash.*** NOTE: *The emergency flashers can be set not to flash and beep volume can be changed. **The buzzer can be set not to sound if a door is not closed securely. ***The turn signal lights can be set not to flash. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. NOTICE Do not push the ”LOCK” button any longer than 2 to 3 seconds. Pushing the button longer activates an alarm. For details, see page 15. 14 When you push the ”UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door is unlocked. Pushing that button once again within 3 seconds from the first push, the passenger’s door is also unlocked.* NOTE: *The 2–step unlocking function can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. At this time, the emergency flashers will flash twice and two beeps will sound.* Together with the activation of unlocking, the interior light comes on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in ”DOOR” position.** However, this function does not work when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. For further information, see ”Interior lights” on page 63. You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless remote unlock feature.*** If a door is not opened by then, all the doors will be automatically locked again. Even if the ”LOCK” or ”UNLOCK” button is kept pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the button and then push again. NOTE: *The emergency flashers can be set not to flash and beep volume can be changed. **The interior light can be set not to come on or the duration of lighting can be changed. ***The time before automatic re–locking can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. KEYS AND DOORS Unlocking the trunk lid Sounding an alarm* 11sa07b 11sa08b When you keep the button pushed for about 1 second, you can unlock the trunk lid.* One beep sounds. This function does not work when the ignition switch is in the ”ON” position. NOTE: *The operation method can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. When you push the ”LOCK” button for about 2 to 3 seconds, an alarm sounds to deter any person trying to break into or damage your vehicle. If you want to stop the alarm, push any button. This function does not work when the ignition switch is in the ”ON” position. NOTE: *The alarm can be set not to sound. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 15 KEYS AND DOORS Operating the side windows The side windows can be operated using a wireless key from outside the vehicle.* NOTE: *The windows can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 11sa06d NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Push the ”UNLOCK” button until the windows start to move. When you release the button, the windows stop operating.  Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. This function will work even with the window lock switch pressed in.  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. For vehicles sold in U.S.A.  Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 16 FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. KEYS AND DOORS For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 11L028–1 Replacing the battery When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery CR1616 or equivalent and a special screwdriver. 1. Remove the screw, and then the cover while pushing it in the arrow direction. CAUTION Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing the removed battery or components. 11L029–1 NOTICE  When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components, screws and O–ring.  Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.  Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. 2. Remove the module from the key frame. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 17 KEYS AND DOORS NOTICE Take care not to damage or bend the O–ring when installing. 11L030–1 6. Install the module into the key frame and secure the cover with the screw. 7. When pushing any button on the wireless key, make sure the indicator light comes on. 3. Remove the 2 screws to take out the lid of the module. 4. Take out the discharged battery and put a new battery with the positive side up. NOTICE  Make sure the positive side and negative side of the battery are faced correctly.  Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause unexpected rust.  Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter or it may interfere with proper operation.  Be careful not to bend the electrode of the battery insertion and that dust or oils do not adhere to the inside of the module.  Take care not to lose the screws and O–ring. 5. Install the lid with 2 screws. 18 KEYS AND DOORS DOORS Locking with inside lock button Locking with key 11sa02 11sa01
1 Lock
1 Lock 2 Unlock Push in the lock button to lock and unlock the door. 2 Unlock Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle to lock and towards the back to unlock. The doors lock and unlock simultaneously with driver’s door. Turning the key once will unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock both side doors simultaneously.* NOTE: *The 2–step unlocking function can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. The side windows can be opened and closed from outside the vehicle using the key. For details, see “Power window switches” on page 29. The side doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles even if the lock buttons are in the locked position. CAUTION Do not pull the inside handle of the side doors while driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur. Lexus strongly recommends that all children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle. Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle. Doors cannot be locked when either side door is open and the key is in the ignition. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 19 KEYS AND DOORS If the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal, rear or side impact with the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position, both side doors will unlock automatically after a few seconds. Locking with power door lock switch CAUTION Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and locked, especially when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened unintentionally. 11sa03b
1 Lock 2 Unlock To lock both side doors simultaneously, push the power door lock switch down on the front side. Pushing down on the rear side will unlock them. The same switch is also found on the front passenger’s side. Auto door locking function*: Both side doors will lock automatically when the selector lever is moved out of “P” position. This auto door locking function is operable while the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. NOTE: * This auto door locking function can be disabled or changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 20 SECTION 1–2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Switches Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight dimmer and turn signal switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight cleaner switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 32 32 21 SWITCHES HEADLIGHT SWITCH 12L086b Manually twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights if they are needed immediately when entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc. When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control knob is turned fully on. NOTE: *The operating condition or sensitivity can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever. FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. 12sa10 SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on. THIRD CLICKSTOP (”AUTO”): The headlights and all other lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the surroundings.* Vehicles sold in U.S.A.: When the headlights are on, the headlight indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. Vehicles sold in Canada: When the tail lights are on, the tail light indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. 22 The automatic light control sensor is on top of the passenger’s side instrument panel. Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor. SWITCHES When you turn on the headlights, the lights automatically turn off about 30 seconds after either door is opened and closed with the ignition switch turned to the ”ACC” or ”LOCK” position.* To turn them on again, turn the ignition switch to the ”ON” position, or turn the headlight switch off and then twist the knob until the first or second clickstop. If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off. NOTE: *The time before turning off the lights can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. When the headlight switch is on with both side doors locked and the trunk closed, pushing the ”LOCK” button on the wireless remote control key turns off the headlights. Daytime Running Light System The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with the engine started, even with the light switch in the ”OFF” position. They will not go off until the ignition switch is turned off. To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights, twist the knob to the first clickstop. Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights to full intensity for driving at night. When setting the knob to the third clickstop (”AUTO”), the headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn on the other lights depending on the darkness of the surroundings. Likewise, as the surroundings become brighter, the headlights will turn to reduced intensity, ultimately turning off the other lights. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 23 SWITCHES Automatic headlight leveling system 12sa01a The headlight beam level is always maintained automatically at the proper level in all loading conditions so that your headlights do not dazzle other road users. If this system fails, the warning light in the instrument cluster comes on. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by Lexus dealer. HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCHES 12L087b For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back. A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or headlight flasher is on. The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is off. 24 SWITCHES FOG LIGHT SWITCH 12L088b 12SA11 For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the conventional manner. The ignition switch must be in the ”ON” position. The turn signal is self–cancelling after a turn, but after a lane change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and holding it there. To turn on the fog lights, turn the switch to the ”ON” position. The fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam. If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse or the indicator light itself has probably failed. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 25 SWITCHES WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCHES 12L120a The time interval between sweeps is shortened when the vehicle speed increases. When the vehicle speed reaches more than about 20 km/h (12 mph) with the interval adjuster in ”F” position, the time interval becomes the shortest 1.5 seconds. If you stop the vehicle with the wiper switch in the ”LO” position, the wiper speed automatically changes from low speed to intermittent operation speed.* This function does not work when the interval adjuster is in the ”F” position. NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. For mist wiper operations (a single wipe), pull the lever toward you and release it.
1 Interval adjuster 2 Washer on To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach the desired speed setting. The ignition switch must be in the ”ON” position. There are 3 settings: ”INT” position: Intermittent operation ”LO” position: Low speed operation ”HI” position: High speed operation Twist the interval adjuster upward to increase the wiping time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease it. The wiper lever must be in the ”INT” position. 26 To make the washer squirt, push the button on the end of the lever. If the wiper lever is in the ”OFF” position, the wipers will automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to sweep the windshield completely.* The interval between the 3 wipes and the last wipe will depend on the vehicle speed. The last sweep does not happen if the vehicle speed exceeds about 170 km/h (106 mph). NOTE: *The last single wipe can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. The low washer warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see ”Adding washer fluid” on page 343. SWITCHES When the outside temperature is below 25 C (77 F), operating the wipers will automatically turn on the outside rear view mirror defogger. The outside rear view mirror defogger turns off 15 minutes after the wiper stops operating. In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could block your vision. HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH 12sa02 NOTICE Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the glass. To spray fluid on the headlights, push the switch with the headlights on. The ignition switch must be in the ”ON” position. The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see ”Adding washer fluid” on page 343. If you push the windshield washer switch with the headlights on, the headlight cleaner operates once automatically. NOTICE Do not turn the headlight cleaner on with the washer fluid tank empty. It may cause the cleaner motor to overheat. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 27 SWITCHES REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR DEFOGGER SWITCH 12sk03 CAUTION Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the switch is on. If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause the battery to discharge, especially during stop–and–go driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to melt snow. If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de–icer before operating the switch. To turn the electric rear window defogger on, push the switch. The ignition switch must be in the ”ON” position. The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window and the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the surface. Keep your hands off the mirror faces when the switch is on. An indicator light is on when the defogger is operating. The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has operated about 15 minutes. 28 When the outside temperature is below 25 C (77 F), operating the wipers turns the outside rear view mirror defogger on automatically . NOTICE  When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors.  To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the defogger continuously longer than necessary. SWITCHES POWER WINDOW SWITCHES 12L010 12sa04b Operating the switches
1 For driver’s window 2 For front passenger’s window To raise or lower the windows, pull the switch halfway up or push it halfway down. To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each door. The passenger’s window can also be controlled by the switch on the driver’s door. Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down. The power windows work when the ignition switch is in the ”ON” position. To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in the opposite direction and then release it. Key off operation: Even if the ignition switch is turned to the ”ACC” or ”LOCK” position, the window can be operated until either side door is opened (or for about 45 seconds). 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 29 SWITCHES Operating the windows from outside the vehicle The windows can be operated using an ignition key.* 12sa05b
Indicator light With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s window can be raised or lowered. NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 12sa06a The indicator lights on the switch tell you which of the switches can be operated. Even with the window lock switch pressed in, the windows will be operated from outside the vehicle using an ignition key or wireless remote control. Insert the ignition key into the keyhole on the driver’s side. To close the windows: Turn the key in the locking direction and hold it. After the door is locked, the windows begin to close. To stop in the middle, return the key. To open the windows: Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it. After the door is unlocked, the windows begin to open. To stop in the middle, return the key. This function will work even with the window lock switch pressed in. 30 SWITCHES Jam protection function If something gets caught between the window and window frame during automatic raising operation, key off raising operation or raising operation using the ignition key from the outside, the window stops and is lowered. If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.  Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.  Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power window switches and get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident. CAUTION  Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.  The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closed.  Before you close the power windows, always make sure there is nobody around the power windows. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes the power windows, make sure that he/she operates the windows safely.  When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 31 SWITCHES EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH 12sa07 12sa08a To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch.
1 For front passenger’s seat All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will work with the engine running or off and with or without the ignition key. The seat heater has 2 dials. Turn the dials to the left to turn the respective seat heaters on. The indicator lights come on. To turn them off, turn the dials to the right until they stop. The indicator lights go off. Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard. Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible. The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency flashers are in operation. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 32 SEAT HEATER SWITCHES 2 For driver’s seat The ignition switch must be in the ”ON” position. SWITCHES CAUTION Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because they may experience minor burns even at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;  Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons or handicapped persons  Persons who have delicate skin  Persons who are exhausted  Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.). To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat. NOTICE  Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.  When cleaning the seats, do not use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat surface.  To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switches off when the engine is not running. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 33 SWITCHES 34 SECTION 1–3 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 36 36 37 38 38 52 54 59 35 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS FUEL GAUGE See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended fuel selection. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE 13sa01b 13sa02c
Low fuel level warning light The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the tank when the ignition switch is on. It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full. If the fuel level approaches ”E” or the low fuel level warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible. On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual. If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately. The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 36
Normal range The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is on. The engine operating temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine load. If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle and allow the engine to cool. Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions, such as:  Driving up a long hill on a hot day.  Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in stop–and–go traffic. TACHOMETER NOTICE  Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the temperature of the engine within the specified operating range. 13sa03b  Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. See ”If your vehicle overheats” on page 238. The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to prevent engine over–revving. Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel economy. NOTICE Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This may cause severe engine damage. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 37 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS ODOMETER AND TRIP METER When calibrating the compass, use both “ODO/TRIP” and “RESET” buttons. For details, see “Calibrating the compass” on page 56. SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS AND WARNING BUZZERS 13sa04b IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... (a) This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To change the mode indication, push the ”ODO/TRIP” button. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip meter records two different distances independently. or (Indicator and buzzer) DO THIS. If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer. Fasten driver’s seat belt. (b) (Indicator and buzzer) For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip. 38 To change the trip meter indication from one trip to the other, push the ”ODO/TRIP” button. To set the A trip meter to zero, display the A meter reading, then push the ”RESET” button. The same applies for the B trip meter. (c) Fasten front passenger’s seat belt. The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected. (d) Take vehicle to Lexus dealer immediately. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... (e) IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... DO THIS. Stop and check. (j) DO THIS. Close all doors. (Indicator and buzzer) (f) Stop and check. (g) (h) (i) (k) Replace bulb. (l) Add washer fluid. Add engine oil. or or Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer. Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. (m) (n) and Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 39 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... (o) DO THIS. (a) Brake System Warning Light and Buzzer This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. Adjust tire pressure.  When the parking brake is applied ... This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position even after the parking brake is released. (p) Low fuel level warning light (q) Key reminder buzzer Remove key. Open retractable hardtop warning buzzer Stop immediately and open or close the retractable hardtop fully. Fill up tank. If you drive your vehicle without releasing the parking brake, the buzzer sounds.  When the brake fluid level is low ... (r) 40 CAUTION It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the brake fluid level is low.  When the hydraulic brake booster fails ... If the hydraulic booster causes a problem resulting in poor braking performance, the warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuously. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the following cases: Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:  The light does not come on even if the parking brake is applied when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.  The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.  The light does not come on even if the ignition switch is turned on with the parking brake released.  Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds. A warning light turned on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. CAUTION  You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction. If either of the following conditions occurs, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.  The light does not turn off even after the parking brake is released while the engine is running.  The warning buzzer comes on together with the warning light. In either case, this can indicate that the brakes may not work properly and your stopping distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an immediate stop.  The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS” warning light. In this case, not only the anti–lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 41 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and Buzzer This light and buzzer remind you to buckle up the driver’s seat belt. Once the ignition switch is turned to ”ON” or ”START”, the reminder light flashes and buzzer comes on if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light stays flashing and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds. (c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder Light This light reminds you to buckle up the front passenger’s seat belt. Once the ignition switch is turned to ”ON” or ”START”, the reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger seat and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless the front passenger fastens the belt, the light stays flashing. However, if a front passenger uses an additional seat cushion, the light may not flash even when the seat belt is not buckled up. If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat, built–in sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure, causing the reminder light to come on. 42 (d) SRS Warning Light This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ”ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners are operating properly. The SRS warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side airbag sensors, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.  When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the light does not come on, remains on or flashes.  The light comes on or starts flashing while driving. If the light stays on, it indicates that the front airbags have a problem. If the light flashes, the side airbags and/or seat belt pretensioners have a problem. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (e) Discharge Warning Light (f) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light This light warns that the battery is being discharged. This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low. If it comes on while you are driving, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine, and check for the cause. Look first at the engine drive belt. If it flickers or stays on while you are driving, pull off the road to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.  If it is loose or broken, the generator will not charge the battery properly. The light may occasionally flicker when the engine is idling or it may come on briefly after a hard stop. There is no cause for concern if it then goes out when the engine is accelerated slightly.  If the belt is O.K., there is a problem somewhere in the charging system. The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning, blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to the nearest Lexus dealer or repair shop. The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the oil level dipstick. NOTICE NOTICE Do not continue driving if the engine drive belt is broken or loose. Do not drive the vehicle with the warning light on – even for one block. It may ruin the engine. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 43 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (g) Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light (h) Malfunction Indicator Lamp This light warns that the engine oil level is too low. Add oil as soon as possible. (For instructions, see ”Checking the engine oil level” on page 308.) This lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes off after the engine starts. This means that the warning light system is operating properly. While driving on steep inclines or rough roads which causes the vehicle to substantially sway or on curves, this light may come on due to the movement of engine oil in the engine. In normal conditions, due to engine oil consumption, this light may come on earlier than the specified service interval of the scheduled maintenance. This is because the engine oil is consumed to the low level within the scheduled maintenance interval and does not indicate a problem. (For detailed information, see “Facts about engine oil consumption” on page 306.) NOTICE Continued engine operation with low engine oil will damage the engine. If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while driving, first check the following:  Empty fuel tank If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.  Loose fuel tank cap If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it. These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips. If the lamp will not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not loose...  There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic transmission electrical system or warning light system itself. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. 44 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS If this lamp comes on and the engine speed does not increase with the accelerator pedal depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in your electronic throttle control system. At this time, vibrations may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your Lexus checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position. Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and OBD (On–Board Diagnostics) system before taking your vehicle for the inspection. For details, see “Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 289. (i) ”ABS” Warning Light The light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again. When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system, the brake assist system, the traction control system and/or the vehicle stability control system do/does not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally. When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.  The light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.  The light comes on while you are driving. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 45 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction: If this light comes on when the headlight switch is turned on (at the first or second clickstop), it indicates that one or more of the tail lights are burned out.  The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off after a while. If it comes on when the brake pedal is depressed, one or more stop lights are burned out.  Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds. CAUTION Have defective bulbs replaced as soon as possible. (l) Low Washer Fluid Warning Light This light comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible. If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. (m) Automatic Headlight Leveling System Warning Light In this case, not only the anti–lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the automatic headlight leveling system. (j) Open Door Warning Light and Buzzer This light remains on until both side doors and trunk lid are completely closed. The buzzer sounds if you drive your vehicle with the doors or trunk lid not closed completely. 46 (k) Rear Light Failure Warning Light If it comes on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (n) Vehicle Stability Control System Warning Lights (o) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light and Chimes These lights warn that there is a problem somewhere in the vehicle stability control system or traction control system. This light and chimes warn you that the tire pressure is low. This light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes off after a few seconds. This means the low tire pressure warning light is operating properly. If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come on, have your vehicle checked by Lexus dealer as soon as possible. The lights will come on when the ignition switch is turned to ”ON”, and will go off after about a few seconds. The lights may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after a while. Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights. It is normal if they go out after a few seconds. If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come on, the vehicle stability control system does not activate, however, it is no problem to continue your driving. If the warning light does not go off, or comes on or blinks during driving, or the chimes sound, this indicates that air pressure is low. Make sure there is no flat tire. If the warning light comes on again even after air is put in the tires, a tire may still be flat. If this warning light comes on, the action you must take is completely different depending on the type of tires used. You must understand how to distinguish tires between standard tires and run–flat tires in order to operate your vehicle safely and should refer to page 217. If you drive over about 180 km/h (112 mph) with the tires not inflated at the designated pressure for high speed driving, the warning light may turn on. If the tires are at the designated pressure for ordinary speed driving, decreasing the speed will turn off the warning light. (For the designated pressure for high speed driving, see “Specifications” on page 318.) This warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire pressure will turn off the warning light. For details about adjusting the tire pressure, see “Checking tire pressure” on page 321. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 47 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS Vehicles with run–flat tires: If the warning light is on, the tire pressure is lower than specified. Stop your vehicle at a safe place as soon as possible and check that the tire pressure is as specified on the tire pressure label. The air pressure gauge is located in the tool bag. If the warning light comes on or blinks even after tire pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. If you cannot verify the tire pressure soon, go to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer at the moderate speed and do not ever exceed 90 km/h (55 mph) and have all your vehicle’s tires checked and adjusted. And whether there is a flat tire or not should be also checked at this time. If any tire must be replaced, see “If you have a flat tire” on page 239. If the warning light does not go off more than 15 minutes after the tire pressure is adjusted, the system might be malfunctioning. Consult your Lexus dealer. CAUTION If the warning light comes on, take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer, tire dealer or gas station as soon as possible, observing the following instructions:  Decelerate as soon as possible to the most appropriate speed that conditions permit. Do not drive over 90 km/h (55 mph).  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury. If the warning light blinks and chimes sound every few minutes, the tire pressure is very low. Decrease your speed as soon as possible and call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance (see”Foreword”). And take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer at a speed below 90 km/h (55 mph). When you drive your vehicle after the low tire pressure warning light blinks and chimes sound, the tire must be replaced. Do not use the repaired tire. 48 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS CAUTION NOTICE If the warning light blinks and chimes sound, take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible, observing the following instructions:  Take due care not to go over a curb stone and be careful of holes in the road because deflated tire pressure affects tire cushion performance. The wheels, tires, body, suspension and other components could be damaged.  Decelerate as soon as possible to the most appropriate speed that conditions permit. Do not drive for longer than 160 km (100 miles) or over 90 km/h (55 mph).  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury.  The warning system may not activate immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage should occur.  When the tires must be replaced, have them replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure sensors will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.  Your ground clearance is reduced if the run–flat tire goes flat so avoid driving over obstacles and drive slowly on rough, unpaved roads and speed bumps. Also, do not attempt to go through an automatic car wash as the vehicle may get caught, resulting in damage.  When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for air pressure sensors as well.  Do not use liquid sealants for flat tire as air pressure sensors will be damaged. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 49 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS Vehicles with standard tires: If the warning light is on, the tire pressure is lower than specified. Stop your vehicle at a safe place as soon as possible and check that the tire pressure is as specified on the tire pressure label. The air pressure gauge is located in the tool bag. If the warning light comes on or blinks even after tire pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. If the tire goes flat, change to the spare tire. (See page 241). The spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure sensor. So, the warning light remains on even if the spare tire is mounted. If the warning light does not go off more than 15 minutes after air is put in the deflated tire, the system might be malfunctioning. Consult your Lexus dealer. CAUTION If the warning light comes on, observe the following instructions:  Decrease the speed as soon as possible.  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury. 50 If the warning light blinks and chimes sound every few minutes, the tire pressure is very low. Stop your vehicle at a safe place as soon as possible and check that the tire pressure is as specified on the tire pressure label. The air pressure gauge is located in the tool bag. Locate the deflated tire and change to the spare tire. For the procedure for changing the tire, see “If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with standard tires)” on page 241. The spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure sensor. So, the warning light remains on even if the spare tire is mounted. CAUTION If the warning light blinks and chimes sound, observe the following instructions:  Decrease the speed as soon as possible.  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury.  The warning system may not activate immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage should occur. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS NOTICE  When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have them repaired or replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure sensors will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.  When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for air pressure sensors as well. How to check all the service reminder indicators (except the low fuel level warning light): 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Open the door. The following service reminder indicator should come on. It goes off when you close the door completely.  Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as air pressure sensors will be damaged. (p) Low Fuel Level Warning Light 3. Turn the ignition switch to ”ON”. This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible. The following service reminder indicators should come on. On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual. w164 (q) Key Reminder Buzzer This buzzer reminds you to remove the key when you open the driver’s door with the ignition switch in the ”ACC” or ”LOCK” position. (r) Open Retractable Hardtop Warning Buzzer The buzzer continues sounding if you drive your vehicle with the retractable hardtop partially closed or opened. Immediately stop your vehicle and open or close the retractable hardtop fully. or or or w158 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 51 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds. or TRIP INFORMATION DISPLAY 13sa09b w158 The following service reminder indicator goes off after 6 seconds. The lights other than the slip indicator light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after a while. If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. The following information is shown on the automatic air conditioning control panel with the ignition switch turned on. Each time you push the “TRIP INFO” button, the displayed information is changed.  Available driving distance  Average fuel consumption  Average vehicle speed  Blank The displayed trip information values indicate the general driving condition and may not always reflect precise and actual conditions. 52 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Available driving distance (Figures with “Mi” or “km”) w167a
When the fuel gauge is not close to ”E” w173a  Average fuel consumption (Figures with “MPG” or “L/100km”) w155b The average fuel consumption is calculated and displayed based on the total driving distance and the total fuel consumption with the engine running. The value is updated every 10 seconds. To begin recalculating, push the ”TRIP INFO” button for more than 1 second.
When the fuel gauge is close to ”E” The available driving distance is calculated and displayed depending on the amount of remaining fuel. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 53 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Average vehicle speed (Figures with “MPH” or “km/h”) COMPASS (Vehicles without Navigation System) w166a 13sa06a The average vehicle speed is calculated and displayed based on the total driving distance and the total driving time with the engine running. The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds. To begin recalculating, push the ”TRIP INFO” button for more than 1 second. When the ignition switch is on, the compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. The illustration shown above indicates the vehicle is heading north. 54 Displays Directions N North NE Northeast E East SE Southeast S South SW Southwest W West NW Northwest GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions: COMPASS SENSOR  The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning. The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.  The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning. The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.  The vehicle is on an inclined surface. 13SA10a  The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).
Compass sensor  The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal object near center of the instrument panel.) The compass sensor is located behind the center of the instrument panel.  The battery has been disconnected.  Any door is open. The compass works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion, if deviation is small. For obtaining additional precision or for complete calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” below. NOTICE Do not put magnets or a metal object near the center of the instrument panel. Doing this may cause malfunction of the compass sensor. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 55 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS CALIBRATING THE COMPASS The direction display on the compass deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle. To adjust for this deviation, stop the vehicle and with the ignition on, push the “ODO/TRIP” button together with the “RESET” button for longer than 3 seconds until the number (1–15) appears on the display. Then push the “RESET” button, referring to the following map to select the number of the zone where the vehicle is. 13sa11
Zone number 56 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS Other Areas Zone Number A. Samoa 7 Hawaii 7 Guam 9 Saipan 9 Puerto Rico 11 13sa07b CAUTION Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. After you select the zone number, push the “ODO/TRIP” button. “––” blinks on the display. Then perform the circling calibration according to the following procedure. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 57 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS CAUTION 13sa08  When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.  Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h (5 mph) or lower) in a circle until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed. After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration is complete with the direction shown on the display. If calibration cannot be performed because of the vehicle is magnetized, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer. If you want to cancel the calibration before it is complete, push the “ODO/TRIP” button while “––” is blinking on the display.  Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).  During calibration, do not operate electric systems (retractable hardtop, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration. 58 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT CONTROL 13SA05a To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the knob. When the headlight switch is in the first or second click stop, you can also adjust the brightness of the displays on the audio and air conditioning systems using this knob. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 59 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS 60 SECTION 1–4 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Interior equipment Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First–aid kit space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie–down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage stowage precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 62 63 63 64 64 65 66 67 68 68 69 74 75 75 76 77 78 78 61 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT VANITY MIRRORS Sun visors 14sa02 14sa01 To use the vanity mirrors, swing the sun visor down and open the cover. 1 To block out glare from the front, swing the sun visor down. The vanity light comes on when you open the cover. 2 To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the hook and swing it to the side. At this position, the vanity light may not come on. 62 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT INTERIOR LIGHT PERSONAL LIGHTS 14sa03b 14sa04b To turn on the interior light, slide the switch. With the switch in the ”DOOR” position, the light comes on when either of the side doors is opened. After both doors are closed, the light remains on for about 15 seconds and then goes out. To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch again. However, in the following cases, the light goes out immediately: 1. Both doors are closed when the ignition switch is in ”ACC” or ”ON” position. 2. The ignition switch is turned to ”ACC” or ”ON” when the light is still on. 3. Both doors are locked when the light is still on. 4. One door is closed with the lock button pushed in while the other door is locked. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 63 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT 14sa05 For easy access to the ignition switch, the ignition switch light comes on when either of the side doors is opened. The light remains on for about 15 seconds and goes out after both side doors are closed. However, the light goes out immediately when both doors are locked or the ignition switch is in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position. CLOCK 14sa06 The digital clock indicates the time on the automatic air conditioning control panel. To reset the hour, press the ”H” button. To reset the minutes, press the ”M” button. To adjust the time to the nearest hour, press the ”:00” button. For example, if the ”:00” button is pressed when the time is between 9:30 – 9:59 or between 10:01 – 10:29, the time will change to 10:00. With the tail lights on, the background brightness of the time indication will be reduced. If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one o’clock). 64 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, always close the ashtray completely after use. 14sa07 To use the cigarette lighter and ashtray, first push against the ashtray cover. Then when the ashtray opens out, press in the cigarette lighter. After it finishes heating up, it automatically pops out ready for use. Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. If the engine is not running, the ignition switch must be in the ”ACC” position to use the lighter. When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire. After using the ashtray, push it back in completely. To remove the ashtray, pull it out. Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for replacement. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 65 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT REAR CONSOLE BOX 14sa10 14sa09b  1 Unlock  1 For upper tray 2 For lower box To use the rear console box, open as shown in the illustration. 2 Lock To lock the lower box, insert the master key and turn it clockwise. A loop of wire for unlocking the trunk lid is located in the lower box. When keeping items in the trunk, be sure to turn off the trunk lid opener main switch and lock the glove box and rear console box. To turn off the trunk lid opener main switch, see page 86. For locking the glove box, see page 68. CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the console box lid closed while driving. 66 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT POWER OUTLET  Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any liquid into the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits. 14sa08 The power outlet located in the lower box contained in the rear console box is designed for power supply for car accessories. The ignition switch must be in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position for the power outlet to be used. NOTICE  To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12V 10A.  To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 67 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT AUXILIARY BOX GLOVE BOX 14sa20 The auxiliary box is located behind the rear console box. To use the box, open the cover. 14sa11  1 Unlock 2 Open 3 Lock Do not keep the valuables in this box as it cannot be locked. To open the glove box door, pull the lever. To lock the glove box door, insert the master key and turn it clockwise. CAUTION With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on when the glove box door is open. To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the auxiliary box closed while driving. CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving. 68 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT The trunk lid opener main switch is located in the glove box. When keeping items in the trunk, be sure to turn off the main switch and lock the glove box and rear console box in which a loop of wire for unlocking the trunk lid is located. To turn off the trunk lid opener main switch, see page 86. For locking the rear console box, see page 66. GARAGE DOOR OPENER  The garage door opener ( Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, etc. (a) Programming the HomeLink 14sa12a  1 Indicator light 2 Buttons HomeLink The in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can store one program for each button. To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink, install a new battery in the hand–held transmitter prior to programming. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 69 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT The battery side of the hand–held transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink during the programming process. 1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program. If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink) flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”. 2. Place your hand–held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another device. Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink  in view while programming. Programming a rolling code system For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market”. 3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand–held garage transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink button. 4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons. 5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the steps listed below. 1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the location of this “training” button. 2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below. 70 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT 3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does open, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door. Programming an entrance gate / Programming all devices in the Canadian market The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink unit and be able to activate the garage door up/down. 2. Place your hand–held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining button to program another rolling code system. HomeLink 1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program. Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink  in view while programming. 3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button. INFORMATION If you register a program in the HomeLink using a “Rolling Code” type transmitter, the transmitter must be reprogrammed to use it again. 4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand–held gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5 is complete. 5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons. 6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly. 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another device. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 71 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT Programming other devices To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance. Reprogramming a button Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased, however, to reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming the HomeLink”. (b) Operating the HomeLink To operate the HomeLink, press the appropriate HomeLink button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink indicator light should come on. If the “Rolling Code” type program is registered, the HomeLink indicator light flashes several times, then remains on. The HomeLink continues to send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed. INFORMATION INFORMATION Keep your hand–held garage transmitter even after programming. The hand–held garage transmitter will be required if reprogramming is necessary. 72 The transmitting range from the HomeLink may differ from that from your hand–held garage transmitter. INTERIOR EQUIPMENT (c) Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs) To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes. If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink memory. CAUTION  When programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or other device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS–210 of the Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada DOC/MPAC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user ’s authority to operate the device.  Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards. (This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object (signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 73 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT CUP HOLDER 14sa24 14sa13a To use the cup holder, push the cup holder lid. To close the cup holder, push in the cup holder in the arrow direction 1 and close the lid in the arrow direction 2 . CAUTION  Do not place anything else other than cups or drink–cans in the cup holder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.  To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder closed when not in use. 74 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT COIN BOX 14sa14b To use the coin box, slide the switch backward. FIRST–AID KIT SPACE 14sa21 This space is provided on the right side of the trunk to accommodate the first–aid kit. CAUTION Keep the coin box closed when not in use. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 75 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT FLOOR MAT 14sa18a 14sa17a CAUTION Use a floor mat of the correct size. If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are designed for use with locking clips. Fix the floor mat with locking clips into the holes in the floor carpet. 76 Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident. INTERIOR EQUIPMENT See “Luggage stowage precautions” on page 78 for precautions in loading luggage. LUGGAGE COVER The retractable hardtop cannot be opened if the luggage cover is not set. NOTICE 14sa22a  Do not place anything on the luggage cover. Doing so could interfere with the retractable hardtop opening and damage its mechanism.  The luggage should be loaded with the cover closed securely. Otherwise the retractable hardtop opening could be interfered and its mechanism could be damaged. To use the luggage cover, 1. Pull the luggage cover out of the retractor. 14sa23b 2. Hook the luggage cover on the anchors and secure the strap on the magnet on the tire or luggage cover. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 77 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT TIE–DOWN HOOKS LUGGAGE STOWAGE PRECAUTIONS When stowing luggage or cargo in the vehicle, observe the following: 14sa16b  Put luggage or cargo in the trunk when at all possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.  Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.  For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. To secure your luggage, use the tie–down hooks as shown above. See “Luggage stowage precautions” on page 78 for precautions in loading luggage. CAUTION  Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or an accident.  Do not drive with objects left on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the driver’s field of view. Or they may move during sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants. NOTICE Do not load the vehicle beyond the vehicle capacity weight specified on the tire pressure label. 78 SECTION 1–5 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Exterior equipment Retractable hardtop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 80 84 85 88 79 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT RETRACTABLE HARDTOP The retractable hardtop is opened or closed with a switch located in the automatic air conditioning control panel. Opening the retractable hardtop Be sure to stop your vehicle in a safe place. To open the retractable hardtop, turn the ignition switch to “ON” position and hold down the switch on the “OPEN” side. The indicator remains on while the retractable hardtop is opening. When the retractable hardtop is fully opened, the indicator goes off and a beep sounds. Conditions for retractable hardtop activation  The luggage cover in the trunk is properly set. See page 77.  The trunk lid is closed. See page 87.  The trunk lid opener main switch in the glove box is on (in pushed–in position). See page 86. 15sa01c If any of the conditions above is not met, the indicator blinks and the retractable hardtop will not activate. However, if the indicator blinks and the retractable hardtop does not activate even with all the conditions above fulfilled, perform either of the following and then open the retractable hardtop.  Start the engine.  Put the selector lever in “P”. If the indicator remains on or off with the switch pushed, and the retractable hardtop does not activate, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. If you hold down the switch on the “OPEN” side after or when the retractable hardtop is opened fully, the side windows will close. If the quarter windows are not opened completely with the retractable hardtop fully opened, hold down the switch on the “OPEN” side again. The quarter windows will be opened. 80 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT If you drive your vehicle without the retractable hardtop opened fully, a beep continues sounding. After you stop your vehicle in a safe place, immediately either open or close the retractable hardtop fully. Closing the retractable hardtop Be sure to stop your vehicle in a safe place. To close the retractable hardtop, turn the ignition switch to “ON” position and hold down the switch on the “CLOSE” side. The indicator remains on while the retractable hardtop is closing. When the retractable hardtop is fully closed, the indicator goes off and a beep sounds. Conditions for retractable hardtop activation  The trunk lid is closed. See page 87. 15sa02c  The trunk lid opener main switch in the glove box is on (in pushed–in position). See page 86. If either of the conditions above is not met, the indicator blinks and the retractable hardtop will not activate. However, if the indicator blinks and the retractable hardtop does not activate even with all the conditions above fulfilled, perform either of the following and then close the retractable hardtop.  Start the engine.  Put the selector lever in “P”. If the indicator remains on or off with the switch pushed, and the retractable hardtop does not activate, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. If you hold down the switch on the “CLOSE” side after or when the retractable hardtop is closed fully, the side windows will close. If the quarter windows are not closed completely with the retractable hardtop fully closed, hold down the switch on the “CLOSE” side again. The quarter windows will be closed. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 81 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT If you drive your vehicle without the retractable hardtop closed fully, a beep continues sounding. After you stop your vehicle in a safe place, immediately either open or close the retractable hardtop fully. Indicator status and retractable hardtop activation: Indicator status Retractable hardtop activation On Partially opened Blink Inoperative Off Fully opened or fully closed The indicator blinks only while the switch is pushed. If the indicator blinks with the switch pushed, and the retractable hardtop does not activate, see “Conditions for retractable hardtop activation” on page 80 and 81. CAUTION To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following:  When opening or closing the retractable hardtop, make sure there is no person around there.  When opening or closing the retractable hardtop, keep hands away from the hinges of the hardtop side rails and any part of the hardtop linkage mechanism.  Do not stop operating the switch in the middle of operation unless otherwise required. The roof will be gradually lowered, resulting in personal injury and damage to the hardtop mechanism.  Do not open or close the retractable hardtop when the wind is strong.  The vehicle should never be driven with the retractable hardtop partially opened. Make sure the hardtop has been either fully opened or fully closed before driving.  While the vehicle is moving with the retractable hardtop opened, nobody should stand up on the seat, sit on the package tray or lean over it. Otherwise, they could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident. 82 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT  Before opening or closing the retractable hardtop, first make sure it is safe to do so. Always make sure nobody places his/her head, hands or other parts of the body on the hardtop mechanism on the windows. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the opening or closing retractable hardtop or the closing windows, it could result in serious injury. If any part of your body or something should be caught, release your hand from the switch immediately. The retractable hardtop operation will be stopped.  Never leave small children alone in the vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. They could use the retractable hardtop switch and get trapped in the retractable hardtop or the windows. Unattended children can be involved in serious accidents.  When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the switch. NOTICE  When opening or closing the retractable hardtop, make sure there is nothing above the vehicle.  Make sure there are no items or packages in the package tray when opening or closing the retractable hardtop. Even small items may interfere with the retractable hardtop operation and can cause damage.  Do not sit or place excessive weight on the retractable hardtop when the hardtop is operating. Damage to the hardtop may occur.  Do not open or close the retractable hardtop when the temperature is below –20C (–4F), or the side windows or quarter windows cannot be opened because they are frozen. Damage to the hardtop, rear window or quarter windows may result. If it is necessary to do so, warm the vehicle in a heated garage prior to operating the retractable hardtop mechanism.  Do not open the retractable hardtop if the hardtop is damp or wet. Possible interior water damage, water stains or mildew on the hardtop material may result.  When the retractable hardtop is completely opened, keep the rear window defogger turned off to avoid damage to the hardtop. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 83 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT  Do not open the trunk when the retractable hardtop is not closed or opened fully. The opened trunk may not be closed.  Do not open or close the retractable hardtop repeatedly within a short time. If the motor prevention circuit activates, the retractable hardtop operation is disabled. In this case, turn the ignition switch off and operate the switch again after a while. HOOD 15sa05a  Do not place anything on the luggage cover. Doing so could interfere with the retractable hardtop opening and damage its mechanism.  The luggage should be loaded with the cover closed securely. Otherwise the retractable hardtop opening could be interfered and its mechanism could be damaged. INFORMATION  Do not operate the retractable hardtop when the vehicle is on the incline or gets on the step. The retractable hardtop may not activate properly.  If you operate the “OPEN/CLOSE” switch after the ignition switch is turned to off and then on with the retractable hardtop opened partially, it takes several seconds before activation. This does not indicate a malfunction.  When you open or close the retractable hardtop, audio sound is automatically adjusted. For details, see page 170. 84 1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever under the instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly. EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT TRUNK LID Trunk lid opener 15sa04 15sa07a 2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood. Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make sure it locks. To open the trunk lid while sitting in the driver’s seat, push the switch with the main switch in the glove box on. CAUTION The trunk lid can be unlocked using the wireless remote control key. For details, see page 15. Before driving, be sure that the hood is securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may occur. If the opener does not operate properly, use the lever located in the rear console box to unlock the trunk lid. See “(a) Unlocking the trunk lid, If the retractable hardtop does not close” on page 258. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 85 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT CAUTION Trunk lid opener main switch  Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only prevents luggage from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.  Always lock the trunk lid and all doors, and keep the vehicle keys out the reach of children. 15sa11  Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Unsupervised children may lock themselves in the vehicle or trunk and suffer serious injuries or death.
Main switch 1 Operative 2 Inoperative If you do not want to activate the trunk lid opener system, turn off the main switch on the left side in the glove box. To turn it on, push in the main switch. The main switch should be on to activate the retractable hardtop. The trunk lid can be opened using a loop of wire in the rear console box even with the main switch in the glove box turned off. When keeping items in the trunk, be sure to turn off the main switch and lock the glove box and rear console box. For locking the glove box, see page 68. For locking the rear console box, see page 66. 86 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT Internal trunk release handle 15sa10 15sa06a To close the trunk lid, pull down the lever and push down the trunk lid. After closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely closed. If a person is locked in the trunk, he/she can pull down the phosphorescent handle on the inside of trunk lid to open the trunk lid. The phosphorescent (glow–in–the–dark) handle will continue to glow for a time after the trunk lid is closed. Exposing the handle to stronger light will cause it to glow longer. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 87 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT FUEL TANK CAP 15sa08b 15sa03b 1. To open the fuel filler door, push the switch. When refueling, turn off the engine. The arrow in the instrument cluster indicates that the fuel filler door is on the left side of your vehicle. It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is opened. When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click. CAUTION If the cap is not tightened securely, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely.  Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames when refuelling. The fumes are flammable.  When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the cap is suddenly removed. 88 2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap slowly counterclockwise, then pause slightly before removing it. The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the fuel filler door. The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT CAUTION In case the opener is not actuated  Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.  Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank pressure. 15sa09a Pull the manual lever toward the back. This is used in case the fuel filler door cannot be opened due to a discharged battery or other trouble. Refueling the vehicle As soon as the correctly operated nozzle switches off automatically for the first time, the tank is full. Do not try to add more fuel, because fuel may spill out. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 89 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT 90 SECTION 1–6 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Comfort adjustment Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Tilt and telescopic steering wheell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 91 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT SEATS While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided. CAUTION  Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are properly seated. Do not allow passengers to sit in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly seated and/or properly restrained by seat belts can be severely injured in the event of emergency braking or a collision.  During driving, do not allow passengers to stand up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking or a collision. Front seat precautions Driver seat CAUTION The driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (”NHTSA”) advises: Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50–75 mm (2–3 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:  Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.  Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non–slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. 92 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT  If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls. Front passenger seat CAUTION The front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seat position and the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright. Front seats CAUTION The side airbags are installed in the driver and front passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.  Do not lean against the door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or severely injured.  Do not use seat accessories which cover the area where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.  Do not modify or replace the seats or the upholstery of seats equipped with side airbags. Such changes may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system, or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 93 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Seat adjustment precautions Adjusting front seats CAUTION  Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.  Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger, luggage or the rear seat. 16sa01c NOTICE Do not operate the control switch in more than one dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload.
1 Seat position control switch, seat cushion angle and height control switch 2 Seatback angle control switch 3 Lumbar support control switch 4 Seatback lock release lever 94 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Adjusting seat position Adjusting seatback angle 16sa02b 16sa03b Move the control switch in the desired direction. Move the control switch in the desired direction. Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not place anything under the seat, as this might interfere with the seat movement. Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position. CAUTION To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal injury. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 95 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Adjusting seat cushion angle and height 16sa04b 96 Adjusting lumbar support 16sa05b Move the control switch in the desired direction. Push the control switch on either side. Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position. The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is pushed. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Inclining front seats for rear seat entry CAUTION  After the seatback returns, try pushing the seatback forward and rearward to make sure it is securely locked.  Never allow anyone to touch seatback lock release levers while the vehicle is moving. 16sa29c Lift the seatback lock release lever on the side of the seat or on the side of the seatback. The seatback will incline. This allows passengers to get in or out of the rear seat easily. If a driver or front passenger uses a seat belt guide, be sure to remove it before inclining the seatback. For seat belt guides, see page 107. After a passenger gets in or out, return the seatback until it locks. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 97 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS TILT AND TELESCOPIC STEERING WHEEL Adjustment of steering wheel tilt 16sa30 16sa10a To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down. To move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push on the top. The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended. CAUTION  Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears.  After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position.  Do not drive with the head restraints removed. 98 To adjust the tilt of the steering wheel, push the control switch upward or downward to set it to the desired position. CAUTION Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Adjustment of telescopic steering column Auto tilt away* 16sa11a 16sa08 To adjust the steering column length, push the control switch forward or backward to set the steering wheel to the desired position. When the ignition key is removed, the steering column moves forward away from the driver and also tilts up for easy exit and entry. CAUTION When the key is inserted in the ignition switch, the steering column returns to the previously set position. Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 99 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS CAUTION  Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. 16sa09 Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your vehicle in the mirror. Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in a normal flat mirror. When the inside rear view mirror darkens in ”AUTO” mode, the outside rear view mirrors also darken to reduce the reflection of the headlights of the following vehicle. For details, see ”Inside rear view mirror” on page 102. When you push the rear window defogger switch or turn on the wipers at lower than 25C (77F) of the outside temperature, the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. For details, see “Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch” on page 28. 100  Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch is on. And do not touch the mirror surfaces also when the wiper switch is on at lower than 25C (77F) of the outside temperature. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT When you are backing up, you can adjust the mirrors down quickly by the following operations with the ignition ON. Power rear view mirror control  Put the selector lever in the “R” position.  Place the master switch at “L” (left) or “R” (right). The mirrors return to the previous position by any of the following operations. 16sa31a  Put the selector lever in a position other than ”R”.  Place the master switch in the neutral position.  Turn the ignition switch to the ”ACC” position.
1 Master switch 2 Control switch To adjust the power rear view mirror, first place the master switch at ”L” (left) or ”R” (right), and move the control switch in the desired side. The power rear view mirrors can be adjusted when the ignition switch is in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position. NOTICE If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de–icer to free the mirror. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 101 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Folding rear view mirrors 16sa07 To fold the rear view mirror, push backward. The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in compact areas. CAUTION Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving. INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR 16sa06a Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror. Pushing the switch changes the mode between ”AUTO” and ”DAY”. The indicator comes on when the ”AUTO” mode is selected. ”DAY” mode: The mirror surface is normal. ”AUTO” mode: If the mirror detects light from the headlights of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface darkens slightly to reduce the reflected light. When the inside rear view mirror surface changes, the outside rear view mirror surfaces will also become darker. When the ignition key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear view mirror always turns on in the ”AUTO” mode. 102 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a little longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of headlights. CAUTION Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. SEAT BELTS Seat belt precautions Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury and/or the severity of injury in accidents. The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them. Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belts. See ”Child restraint” on page 126 for details. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. 16sa06–1 To ensure correct functioning of an anti–glare mirror sensor located on the back side of the mirror, do not touch or cover the sensor with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc. If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn properly. Do not let the child sit on your lap. It does not provide sufficient restraint. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause severe injury to the child. Do not allow the child to stand up or kneel on either rear or front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or a collision. Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips and not on the waist. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 103 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific recommendations. CAUTION Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision. When using the seat belts, observe the following:  Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use a single belt for two or more people – even children.  Avoid reclining the seatbacks too much. The seat belts provide maximum protection when the seatbacks are in the upright position. (See ”Adjusting seatback angle” on page 95.)  Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or pinched in the seat or doors. 104  Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.  Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners – they may severely weaken the belts. (See ”Cleaning the interior” on page 355 for instructions.)  Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Front seat belt buckle illumination Fastening seat belts 16sa12 16sa13a Opening the driver’s door lights up the driver’s seat belt buckle for easy use. The same applies for the front passenger’s door and seat belt buckle. Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the tab into the buckle. The light remains on for 15 seconds after the door is closed, but goes off immediately when both side doors are locked. You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle. The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the seat position. The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move around freely. When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system securely. (For details, see ”Child restraint” on page 126.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 105 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. CAUTION 16sa14a  After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted.  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.  If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury. Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts. 1 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips – not on your waist. 2 Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion upward through the latch plate. CAUTION  Both high–positioned lap belts and loose–fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hip as possible.  For your safety, do not place the shoulder belt under your arm. 106 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Seat belt guides 16sa15b 16sa32b To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts. The seat belt guides are attached on the shoulders of the front seats so that smaller front occupants can easily use the seat belts. To use the seat belt guide, unattach the hook, let the seat belt run under the guide and then reattach the hook. CAUTION  When you get into or out of the rear seats, release the seat belt from the seat belt guide.  Always make sure that the belt webbing is not twisted and runs freely through the guide when using it.  Always adjust the seat belt webbing snugly, adjust the seat belt guide and seat position to assure proper fit and comfort of your seat belt. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 107 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Rear seat belt holders Seat belt extender If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge. 16sa76b Please contact your local Lexus dealer to order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your Lexus dealer. CAUTION Hold the rear seat belt with the holder when not in use. CAUTION Release the rear seat belt holder when using the rear seat belt. When using the seat belt extender, observe the following. Failure to follow these instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.  Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for another person, or at a different seating position than the one originally intended.  Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. 108 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT  Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision. CAUTION  After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the seat belt extender is not twisted.  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.  If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury. 16sa16a To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into the seat belt buckle so that the ”PRESS” signs on the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing outward as shown. You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle. When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself. When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 109 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Front seat belt pretensioners 16sa33a 16sa17c The driver and front passenger’s seat belt pretensioners are designed to be activated in response to a severe frontal impact. When the airbag sensor detects the shock of a severe frontal impact, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back by the retractor so that the belts snugly restrain the front seat occupants. The front passenger seat belt pretensioner will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger seat belt pretensioner may activate if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat. The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in case of collisions at certain speeds and angles. 110 This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the front seat belt pretensioners are operating properly. This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side airbag sensors, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see ”Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 38.) COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION Do not modify, remove, strike or open the front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Doing any of these may cause sudden operation of the front seat belt pretensioners or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury. 16st05
1 2 3 4 5 6 Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repairs and modifications. Front airbag sensors Front seat belt pretensioner assembly SRS warning light Airbag sensor assembly Occupant detection sensor Seat belt buckle switch NOTICE The front seat belt pretensioner system mainly consists of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration. The front seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor. When the front seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard and a small amount of smoke–like gas may be released. This gas is harmless and does not indicate that a fire is occurring. Once the front seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat belt retractors remain locked. Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the front seat belt pretensioners in some cases.  Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two–way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player.  Repairs on or near the front seat belt retractor assemblies.  Modification of the suspension system.  Modification of the front end structure.  Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 111 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT  Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure or console. 16sa19 16sa33a In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. This front seat belt pretensioner system has a service reminder indicator to inform the driver of operating problems. If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.  When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the light does not come on or flashes.  The light flashes while driving.  If either front seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant front seat belt pretensioner.  The front seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area has been damaged. 112  The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that did not cause the front seat belt pretensioners to operate.  Either front seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT SRS AIRBAGS The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver and front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts. Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver when the front airbags are inflated. Be sure to wear your seat belt properly. CAUTION The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured. Lexus strongly recommends that: 16sa20b  The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle.  The front passenger sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.
Front airbags  All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using the available seat belts. In response to a severe frontal impact, the front airbags work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The front airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s head or chest directly hitting the steering wheel or dashboard.  Always make sure that the belt webbing is not twisted and runs freely through the guide when using it. The front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat.  Always adjust the seat belt webbing snugly, adjust the seat belt guide and seat position to assure proper fit and comfort of your seat belt. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 113 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION 16sa21b The side airbags inflate with considerable force. To avoid potential death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver and front passenger must:  Wear their seat belts properly.  Remain properly seated with their back upright and against the seat at all times.  Always make sure that the belt webbing is not twisted and runs freely through the guide when using it.
Side airbags In response to a severe side impact, the side airbags for the driver or front passenger work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The side airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s chest. The side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat. Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver and passenger when the side airbags are inflated. Be sure to wear your seat belt properly. 114  Always adjust the seat belt webbing snugly, adjust the seat belt guide and seat position to assure proper fit and comfort of your seat belt. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (a collision in which the front of the vehicle ”underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.). 16sa33a It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together. This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ”ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags are operating properly. For the safety of all occupants, always wear your seat belts properly. This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side airbag sensors, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see ”Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 38.) The front airbags are designed to deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold level. The front airbags will work if the severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when the vehicle has the impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 115 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa23b 16sa24
1 Collision from the side at an angle 2 Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment
1 Collision from the side 3 Vehicle rollover 2 Collision from the rear The front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low–speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the front airbags may occur. 116 The side airbags may not inflate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as shown in the illustration. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa25 16sa26
1 Collision from the front 2 Collision from the rear 3 Vehicle rollover
1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard material 2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole 3 Landing hard or vehicle falling The side airbags are not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low–speed side collision. The SRS airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 117 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16st04
1 Side airbag module (airbag and inflator) 2 Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator) 3 Side airbag sensors 4 Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator) 5 SRS warning light 6 Airbag sensor assembly 7 Front airbag sensors 8 Door side airbag sensors 9 Occupant detection sensor 10 Seat belt buckle switch The SRS airbag system mainly consists of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensors. 118 The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. In a severe side impact, the side airbag sensor triggers the side airbag inflator. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non–toxic gas to help restrain the forward or lateral motion of the occupants. The front airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the driver’s vision should it be necessary to continue driving. When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with non–toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can physically and safely exit the vehicle after a collision, you should do so at the first opportunity. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. This is why it is important for the occupant to; avoid placing any object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the airbag module, while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The airbags inflate only once. The windshield may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag. CAUTION  The SRS airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver side and front passenger side seat belt systems. The front seat occupants can be killed or seriously injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat belts properly. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front passenger can move forward or sideways into direct contact with or close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see ”Seat belts” on page 103.  Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the safest for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 126. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 119 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa34  Never put a rear–facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat because the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child. 16sa35
Move seat fully back  A forward–facing child restraint system should be allowed to be put on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child.  Do not allow the child to lean against the door or around the door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag inflates, because the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 126. 120 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa36 16sa37  Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front passenger airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the seat, and always use your seat belt properly.  Do not lean against the door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.  Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply excessive weight to the outer side of the front seats on vehicles with side airbags. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 121 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa38a  Do not get your head closer to the area where the side airbag inflates, since the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle. 122 16sa39a  Do not allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger seat, since the front passenger airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.  Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use a child restraint system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 126. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa41a 16sa42a  Do not put objects or your pets on or in front of the dashboard or steering wheel pad that houses the driver and front passenger airbag system. They might restrict inflation or cause death or serious injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.  Do not attach a cup holder or any other device or object on or around the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cup holder or any other device or object will be thrown with great force, or the side airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 123 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT  Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.  Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify, remove, strike or open any components, such as the steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover, front passenger airbag cover or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may cause sudden front airbags inflation or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury.  Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of front seats equipped with side airbags. Such changes may disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repairs and modifications. 124 NOTICE Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system in some cases.  Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two–way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player.  Modification of the suspension system.  Modification of the front end structure and side structure of the passenger compartment.  Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end.  Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or front seats. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa33a 16sa43a This SRS airbag system has a service reminder indicator to inform the driver of operating problems. If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.  When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the light does not come on, stays on or flashes.  The light comes on or starts flashing while driving. If the light stays on, it indicates that the front airbags have a problem. If the light flashes, the side airbags have a problem. In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible:  Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.  The front of the vehicle and portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 125 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT  The surface of the seats with the side airbags or the pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger airbag cover (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. CHILD RESTRAINT Child restraint precautions Lexus strongly urges the use of child restraint systems for children small enough to use them. The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of a child restraint system. Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s seat belt. See ”Seat belts” on page 103 for details. CAUTION  For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on age and size. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior if you are unrestrained.  Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. 126 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT  Never put a rear–facing child restraint system on the front seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag can cause death or serious injury if a rear–facing child restraint system is put on the front seat.  A forward–facing child restraint system should be allowed to be put on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child.  Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured.  Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision. Child restraint system A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully consult the manufacturer ’s instructions which accompany the child restraint system. To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system following the manufacturer ’s instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child for the restraint system. Install the child restraint system correctly following the instructions provided by its manufacturer of the system. General directions are also provided under the following illustrations. The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.  Do not allow the child to lean against the door or around the door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag inflates, because the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 127 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION  Never put a rear–facing child restraint system on the front seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag can cause death or serious injury if a rear–facing child restraint system is put on the front seat.  A forward–facing child restraint system should be allowed to be put on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child.  Do not allow the child to lean against the door or around the door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag inflates, because the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint system. For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “Using a top strap” on page 141. Types of child restraint system Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types depending on the child’s age and size. (A) Infant seat (B) Convertible seat (C) Booster seat Install the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. Child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used. See “Installation with child restraint lower anchorages” on page 143. (A) Infant seat  After installing the child restraint system, make sure it is secured in place according to the manufacturer’s instructions. If it is not restrained securely, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident. When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with the seat belt or place it in the trunk or somewhere other than in the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. 128 16sa46c COMFORT ADJUSTMENT (B) Convertible seat INSTALLATION WITH 3–POINT TYPE SEAT BELT (A) Infant seat installation 16sa47c 16sa46c (C) Booster seat An infant seat is used in rear–facing position only. 16sa48c 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 129 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa34 CAUTION  Never put a rear–facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat because the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child. 130 16sa50d  Do not put a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. This may cause death or serious injury to the child and front passenger in case of sudden braking or a collision.  If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa67a 16sa51c If the seatback in the front passenger seat is inclined, return it in position and slide the seat forward before installing the child restraint system. 1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and inserting the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight. CAUTION  After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.  If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect your child from injury. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 131 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa52c 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended. To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract. 132 16sa53c 3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the infant seat securely. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa54c 16sa55a CAUTION Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. 4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle–release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 133 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT (B) Convertible seat installation 16sa47c A convertible seat is used in forward–facing or rear–facing position depending on the age and size of the child. When installing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child as well as directions for installing the child restraint system. 134 16sa56 CAUTION  Never put a rear–facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat because the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa57 16sa58d
Move seat fully back  A forward–facing child restraint system should be allowed to be put on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child.  Do not allow the child to lean against the door or around the door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag inflates, because the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.  Do not put a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. This may cause death or serious injury to the child and front passenger in case of sudden braking or a collision.  If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 135 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa67a If the seatback in the front passenger seat is inclined, return it in position and slide the seat forward before child restraint system installation. 16sa59d 1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the convertible seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and inserting the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight. CAUTION  After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.  If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect your child from injury. 136 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa60d 16sa61d 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted slightly, it cannot be extended. To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract. 3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 137 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa62d CAUTION Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. 138 16sa63a 4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle–release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT (C) Booster seat installation 16sa48c 16sa64
Move seat fully back A booster seat is used in forward–facing position only. CAUTION  A forward–facing child restraint system should be allowed to be put on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child.  Do not allow the child to lean against the door or around the door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag inflates, because the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 139 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION 16sa65c 1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and across the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle. Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on child’s hips. See ”Seat belts” on page 103 for details.  Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off child’s shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause serious injuries in a collision.  Both high–positioned lap belts and loose–fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hip as possible.  For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt under child’s arm.  After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.  If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect your child from injury. 140 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Using a top strap 16sa66a 16sa68a 2. To remove the child restraint system, press the buckle–release button and allow the belt to retract. Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap. When installing a top strap, the retractable hardtop should be open. How to open the retractable hardtop can be found in “Retractable hardtop” on page 80. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 141 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa69b 16sa70a
Anchor brackets
1 Rear cover Use the anchor bracket in the head restraints of the rear seats. TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position. 1. Insert your hand under the rear cover and remove it. 2 Anchor bracket 2. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt. 3. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap. 142 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Installation with child restraint lower anchorages 16sa71c 16sa72
1 Top strap 2 Rear cover 4. Install the rear cover as shown in the illustration A . For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Type of child restraint system” on page 128. When the top strap is not used, install the rear cover as shown in illustration B . CAUTION  Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. The lower anchorages for the child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specification are installed in the rear seat. The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback of each rear seat. Child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specification can be fixed with these anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle.  Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 143 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16sa73d 16sa74e Canada only
Type A 144 Canada only
Type B COMFORT ADJUSTMENT For owners in Canada The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION Type A: 1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower anchorages below the tag in the seatback. 2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps. Type B: 1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower anchorages below the tag in the seatback. CAUTION  When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught.  Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.  Do not put a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. This can cause death or severe injury to the child and front passenger in case of sudden braking or a collision. 2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages. If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top strap” on page 141.) For the installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 145 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM A microcomputer will memorize the position of the driver’s seat, the positions of the tilt and telescopic steering, and outside rear view mirrors. Two different driving position profiles can be entered into the computer’s memory. Recording a driving position in the computer’s memory can only be done when the ignition switch is in the ”ON” position and the selector lever is in the ”P” position. The same buttons are found on the front passenger’s side, allowing the position of the front passenger’s seat to be memorized. Setting the driving position 16sa44 1. Adjust the driver’s seat, tilt and telescopic steering and outside rear view mirrors to the desired position. 146 2. While pushing the ”SET” button, push button ”1” or ”2” until the signal beeps. The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the computer’s memory. By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded. To set a new memorized position, select the desired position and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and the new position will be set. To make only slight changes to an already memorized position, the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then make the desired changes and perform step 2 above. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Front passenger’s side: Recalling the memorized position  Ignition switch “ON” and selector lever in “N” or “P” position with the vehicle stopped.  Within 30 seconds of opening front passenger’s door. If any driving position memory button is pushed while one of the memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the operation will stop. 16sa45 To activate the system, push the desired button (”1” or ”2”) again. The driving position memory control system cannot be operated while the vehicle is moving. When you push button ”1” or ”2”, the signal beeps and the driving position automatically adjusts to the position recorded for that button. If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have to be set again. Conditions for memorized position activation CAUTION Driver’s side:  Ignition switch ”ON” and selector lever in ”N” or ”P” position with the vehicle stopped. All parts of the memorized positions can be activated.  Ignition switch off and within 30 seconds of opening driver’s door. The memorized position can be activated, except for the tilt and telescopic steering.  Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are being made.  Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat could strike the rear passenger or hit your body against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another driving position memory button. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 147 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 148 SECTION 1–7 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Theft deterrent Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 149 THEFT DETERRENT THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM 17sa01a 17sa02
Security indicator light To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to sound an alarm if any of the doors, trunk or hood is forcibly unlocked or the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected while the vehicle is locked. The alarm blows the horn intermittently, flashes the headlights, tail lights, turn signal lights and other exterior lights, and illuminates the interior lights. Setting the system 1. If the retractable hardtop is opened, close it. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ”LOCK” position and remove the key. The engine immobiliser system causes the indicator light to flash. 3. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and hood using an ignition key or wireless remote control. If you lock them with wireless remote control, the turn signals flash once.* NOTE: *The turn signals can be set not to flash. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. The flashing indicator light remains on when all the doors, trunk and hood are closed and locked. 150 THEFT DETERRENT 4. After 30 seconds, the indicator starts flashing and the system is set. Testing the system Cancelling the system 2. Set the system as described above. When you unlock any door or trunk using an ignition key or wireless remote control, the system is cancelled. The doors should be locked with the ignition key or wireless remote control. Be sure to wait until the indicator light starts flashing. If you unlock any door or trunk with wireless remote control, the turn signals flash twice.* NOTE: *The turn signals can be set not to flash. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. Activating the system The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are operated:  Unlocking any door or trunk without using an ignition key or wireless remote control. 1. Open all the windows. 3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside. The system should activate the alarm. 4. Unlock any of the doors with a key or the wireless remote control to cancel the system. 5. Repeat this operation for the other doors and hood. When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated when the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected. If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.  Opening the hood forcibly.  Reconnecting the battery. If any door is unlocked and the ignition key is not in the ignition switch during the alarm sounding, its door is automatically locked. To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods.  Unlock the door or trunk using an ignition key or wireless remote control. NOTICE When disconnecting the battery, be sure to cancel the theft deterrent system. Otherwise, the system could activate an alarm and lock the unlocked door(s) automatically.  Turn the ignition switch on. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 151 THEFT DETERRENT THEFT PREVENTION LABELS 17L002 Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 56 mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.). The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels intact from one part to another will be impossible. NOTICE You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws. 152 SECTION 2–1 AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO Air conditioning Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 153 AIR CONDITIONING AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS You can adjust the brightness of the display. See “Instrument panel light control” on page 59 for details. The display may be tinged in purple due to the reflection of sunlight, but this is not a malfunction. The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains the set temperature. 21sk01 154 In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and on–off of the air conditioning according to the temperature. The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. AIR CONDITIONING 1 Driver side temperature display (in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade) 2 Fan speed display 3 Air flow display 4 Outside temperature display (in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade) 5 Passenger side temperature display (in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade) 6 Separate/dual control button 7 Passenger side temperature control button 8 Air conditioning on–off button 9 Air intake control button 10 Air flow control button 11 Fan speed control button 12 OFF button 13 Automatic control button 14 Driver side temperature control button 15 Front windshield button 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 155 AIR CONDITIONING Air flow selection 21sa11c 156 Air flows from the lap–jet vents only when the retractable hardtop is opened. See “Lower vent” on page 165. AIR CONDITIONING (a) Climate control SETTING OPERATION – automatic control 21sk02 21sa10 2. Use the ”TEMP” or ”PASSENGER TEMP” button to set the desired temperature. 1. Push the ”AUTO” button. Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on–off of the air conditioning, and switching of the air intake between RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator. When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically. It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details about this, see page 165. Push the ”OFF” button to turn the air conditioning off. The ”TEMP” or ”PASSENGER TEMP” button is used to set the desired temperature. The temperature will be controlled on the driver and passenger sides simultaneously or individually. ”TEMP” button – Changes the temperature on the driver and passenger sides simultaneously or the driver side only. ”PASSENGER TEMP” button – Changes the temperature settings separate from the driver side. ”DUAL” button – Changes the mode of the temperature setting. The indicator on the ”DUAL” button has two modes:  With the indicator on – For individual temperature setting  With the indicator off – For simultaneous temperature setting 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 157 AIR CONDITIONING SETTING OPERATION – manual control When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically. If manual air flow selection is desired – 21sa04 21sa12b The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected manually by pushing the button. The function of each mode is as follows: Driver side setting 1 Panel – Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents. 2 Bi–level – Air flows from the floor vents, the instrument panel vents and the lap–jet vents (if the retractable hardtop is opened). 3 Floor – Air flows mainly from the floor vents and the lap–jet vents (if the retractable hardtop is opened). Passenger side setting Mixed setting It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details about this, see page 165. 158 AIR CONDITIONING 4 Floor/Windshield – Air flows mainly from the floor vents, the windshield vents and the lap–jet vents (if the retractable hardtop is opened). If manual switching of air intake is desired – It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details about this, see page 165. If quick heating or cooling is desired – 21sa02 Push the ”TEMP” or ”PASSENGER TEMP” button on either side and hold it until the maximum figure or minimum figure appears on the display. If manual fan speed control is desired – Each time you push the air intake control button, the mode changes in order from the RECIRCULATED AIR mode to AUTOMATIC mode to OUTSIDE AIR mode, then back to the RECIRCULATED AIR mode. Each indicator light shows which mode is now selected. 21sa03a  1 Fan speed at low 1 RECIRCULATED mode – If quick circulation of cooled air is desired, select this mode. 2 EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode – If the outside air contains harmful substances like exhaust gas (i.e., when the vehicle running just in front of your vehicle accelerates rapidly), the system changes automatically from the OUTSIDE AIR mode (with indicators 2 and 3 on) to the RECIRCULATED mode (with indicators 1 and 2 on). 3 OUTSIDE AIR mode – The system will take fresh outside air into the vehicle. 2 Fan speed at high The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by pushing the appropriate side of fan speed control button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the ”OFF” button turns off the fan. To remove exterior windshield frost, use the high speed setting. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 159 AIR CONDITIONING Turning off the air conditioning manually will cancel the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode. If you select the “AUTO” mode during fan operating, the air conditioning turns on and the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will operate. For normal use, it is best to keep the air intake control button set to OUTSIDE AIR mode. If recirculated air is used during heating, the windows will fog up more easily. To change the sensitivity of the sensor switching between the RECIRCULATED and OUTSIDE AIR in the AUTOMATIC mode, push the air intake control button until the ”AUTO” indicator light flashes. The display changes as illustrated below. The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted only while the vehicle has stopped. 160 21sa08a Each time you push the ”TEMP” button, the sensitivity changes from ”+3” down to ”–3”. If you do not operate any button for a few seconds or if you push a button other than the air intake control button and driver side temperature control button, the previous display returns. AIR CONDITIONING If manual on–off of the air conditioning is desired – (b) Windshield defogging and defrosting Push the ”A/C” button to turn the air conditioning on and push it again to turn the air conditioning off. If you turn off the air conditioning manually, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will be cancelled. If the outside temperature is lowered down to around 0C (32F), the air conditioning will turn off automatically. At this time, the indicator on the A/C button is off and the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC indicator light remains on. However, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode does not operate. When the air conditioning turns on as with the raised temperature, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode resumes. If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year–round automatic temperature control including cooling and dehumidifying operation. If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the indicator of the ”A/C” button will blink. If the indicator of the ”A/C” button blinks even when the ”A/C” button is pushed again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus dealer. 21sa07 To remove interior fog on the windshield – Push the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button. To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield – 1. Place the temperature control button at the maximum temperature. 2. Push the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button. 3. Push the fan speed control button on the right side to obtain a maximum air flow. For further information for removing frost and fog, see “Lower vent” on page 165. Displaying the outside temperature – The temperature display ranges from –30C (–22F) up to 50C (122F). 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 161 AIR CONDITIONING When the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button is pushed while operating in automatic mode, the air conditioning is set to operate and the OUTSIDE AIR mode is set. (c) Air conditioning filter If you push the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button once again while in the FRONT WINDSHIELD mode, the mode then returns to the last mode used. CAUTION Do not use the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button during cooled air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision. 21sa15 The air conditioning filter information label is placed in the glove box as shown and indicates that a filter has been installed. The air conditioning filter prevents dust from entering the vehicle through the air conditioning vent. The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box. The air conditioning filter may clog after long use which will reduce the air flow. However, you can inspect the filter easily. When you inspect and replace the filter, be sure to turn off the fan. 162 AIR CONDITIONING 21sa13c 21L164a Soft cloth  1 Filter 1. Use pliers to remove the 2 pins installed on the upper part of the glove box and lower the glove box. 3. Remove the filter from the filter case. 2 Filter case 4. Inspect the filter on the surface. If it is dirty, it should be replaced. To maintain the air conditioning efficiency, replace the filter every 16,000 km (7,500 miles). 21sa14b NOTICE When setting the filter to the filter case, the UP marks shown on the filter and filter case should be noted and fitted as shown. 2. Remove the cover and take out the filter. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 163 AIR CONDITIONING INFORMATION The filter should be installed properly in position. The use of air conditioning with the filter removed may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance. (d) Operating tips  Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are not blocked by leaves or other obstructions.  If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the dashboard vents. (See ”Center vents”, ”Side vents” and “Lower vent”.)  To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun, drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After the excess heat has blown away, close the windows.  When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake control button be left to the OUTSIDE AIR mode and the fan speed control button be pressed to anywhere except the ”OFF” button.  If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air intake control button be temporarily pressed in to the RECIRCULATED AIR mode, which will close off the outside passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the vehicle interior. 164 AIR CONDITIONING Center vents Lower vent 21st01 21sa14a The center vents may be opened or closed as shown. The lower vent may be opened or closed as shown. Side vents For removing frost or fog, it is recommended that you close the lower vent when you push the “FRONT WINDSHIELD” button, or use the “Floor” or the “Floor/Windshield” mode. 21sa06 The side vents may be opened or closed as shown. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 165 AIR CONDITIONING 166 SECTION 2–2 AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO Audio Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 167 AUDIO AUDIO SYSTEM Quick reference for your audio system 22sa01a
You can adjust the brightness of the display. See “Instrument panel light control” on page 59 for details. The display may be tinged in purple due to the reflection of sunlight, but this is not a malfunction. 168 AUDIO 1 Ejecting a compact disc (See page 182 for details.) 2 Display of functions in TAPE or CD mode 
: Side change (See page 180 for details.) : DOLBY NR (See page 179 for details.) : Rewinding or reversing (See page 180 or 185 for details.)

: Fast forwarding (See page 180 or 185 for details.) RPT: Automatic repeat (See page 180 or 185 for details.) SKIP: Automatic skip of blank portions of tape (See page 180 for details.) : Disc selection (See page 184 for details.) RAND:Random access (See page 186 for details.) SCAN: Scan selection (See page 184 for details.) 3 Compact disc slot (See page 182 for details.) 4 Function buttons 1 – 6: Station selector buttons (See page 176 for details.) SCAN: Scan tuning (See page 176 for details.) MSG: Message button (See page 178 for details.) 5 Compact disc load button (See page 182 for details.) 6 AUDIO–TUNE knob (See page 172 for details.) 7 Radio data system/Program type (See page 177 for details.) 8 Traffic announcement (See page 177 for details.) 9 Mode selectors (See page 171 for details.) 10 Cassette tape slot (See page 179 for details.) 11 Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape (See page 179 for details.) 12 Radio mode: Seek tuning (See page 176 for details.) TAPE mode: Direct access to a desired program (See page 181 for details.) CD mode: Direct access to a desired program (See page 185 for details.) 13 Turning the system on and adjusting the volume (See page 171 for details.) 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 169 AUDIO Using your audio system: some basics (a) Your audio system This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus audio system. Some information may not pertain to your system. Your audio system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality automatically when you are opening or closing the retractable hardtop. While the system is adjusting the audio sound, the audio sound fades out and then fades in. 22sa30a Your audio system works when the ignition switch is in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the car audio on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. Push this button to open or close the audio door. CAUTION Take care not to jam your hands while opening or closing the audio door. Otherwise, you could be injured. NOTICE To prevent your audio system from being damaged, keep the following in mind:  Do not hold the door while it is opening or closing.  Do not open or close the audio door by your hands. 170 AUDIO (b) Turning the system on and off 22sa02 Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn this knob to adjust the volume. The system turns on in the last mode used. 22sa03 Push ”AM”, ”FM”, ”TAPE” or ”DISC” to turn on that mode. The selected mode turns on directly. Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to another. If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette player or compact disc player does not turn on. You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on again. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 171 AUDIO 22sa04 In the ”TAPE” or ”CD” mode, the applicable functions are shown in the lowest part of the display. Push the switch just below to turn on each function. (c) Tone and balance How good an audio program sounds to you is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid–range, and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid–range, and bass. A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important. Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another. 172 22sa05 Each time you push the ”AUDIO–TUNE” knob, the display changes as in the following. To adjust the tone and balance or turn on or off the automatic sound levelizer, turn the knob. BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones. MID: Adjusts mid–pitched tones. TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones. BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. ASL: Turns on or off the automatic sound levelizer. Automatic sound levelizer: When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, the system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to the noise level. While the automatic sound levelizer is on, “ASL” appears on the display. AUDIO (d) Your radio antennas (e) Your cassette player The power antenna automatically extends when the radio mode or the “RDS” (Radio Data System) is on and retracts when it is off. When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should face to the right. The wire antenna is mounted inside the windshield. CAUTION NOTICE Do not oil any part of the cassette player, and do not insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot. Before extending the antenna, confirm that no one is close enough to get injured. NOTICE  To prevent damage to the antenna, make sure it is retracted before driving your vehicle through an automatic car wash.  When cleaning the inside of the windshield, be careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna.  Putting a window tint (especially, conductive or metallic type) on the windshield may affect the reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the installation of the window tint, consult with your Lexus dealer. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 173 AUDIO  The following products may not be playable on your compact disc player. (f) Your changer Copy–protected CD CD–R (CD–Recordable) CD–RW (CD–Re–writable) CD–ROM 22sa06  Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only. Radio operation (a) Listening to the radio Your changer can store up to 6 discs and play selected discs or continuously play all the discs set in the player. When you set discs into the player, make sure their labels face up. If not, the player will display ”ERROR1” and the disc number. 22sa07 NOTICE  Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact disc player. Do not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.  Do not insert a disc upon another one, or it will damage the changer. Insert only one disc into the slot at a time. 174 Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station. ”AM”, ”FM1”, ”FM2” or “FM TYPE” appears on the display. AUDIO (b) Presetting a station 22sa12 Turn this knob to the right to step up the station band or to the left to step down. Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. ”ST” appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, ”ST” disappears from the display. 22sa08 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Push one of the station selector buttons ( 1–6 ) and hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the button and the button number ( 1–6 ) appears on the display. Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To change the preset station to a different one, follow the same procedure. The preset station memory is cancelled when the power source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 175 AUDIO (c) Selecting a station Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods. 22sa09 22sa13 Seek tuning: Push the ”SEEK” button. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched automatically one after another. Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1–6 ) for the station you want. The button number ( 1–6 ) and station frequency appear on the display. Manual tuning: Turn the “AUDIO–TUNE” knob. The radio will step up or down to another frequency. 176 To scan all the frequencies: Push the ”SCAN” button briefly. ”SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again. To select a station, push the ”SCAN” button a second time. To scan the preset stations: Push the ”SCAN” button until you hear a beep. ”P.SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To select a station, push the ”SCAN” button a second time. AUDIO (d) RDS (Radio Data System) TYPE (Program type): When you push the “TYPE” button while receiving an RDS station, the current program type appears on the display. Each time you push the “TYPE” button, the program type changes as in the following: 22sa14  ROCK  EASY LIS (Easy listening)  CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz)  R&B (Rhythm and Blues)  INFORM (Information) When you push the “RDS” button briefly during FM reception, the RDS turns on. “RDS” and “RDS SEARCH” appear on the display and the radio starts to search RDS stations.  RELIGION If no RDS stations can be found, “NOTHING” appears and the display returns to the previous mode.  ALERT (Emergency message) If RDS stations are found, “FOUND **ST” appears on the display (** indicating the number of stations which are found) in the FM TYPE mode and the RDS stations are preset by program type. To turn off the RDS, push the “RDS” button until you hear a beep.  MISC TRAF (Traffic) function: A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located. When you push the “TRAF” button, “TRAF SEEK” appears on the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program station. If no traffic program station is found, “NO TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a few seconds and the display returns to the previous mode. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 177 AUDIO Radio text message: To recall a radio text message, push the “MSG” button. Each time you push the button, the available message will be displayed beginning with the newest one. If there is no radio text message in memory and when no message is received, “NO MSG STORED” appears on the display. After this, the display returns to the previous mode. 22sa15 If the radio receives a radio text message during FM reception, “MSG” and a text message appears on the display. After the text message goes off, “MSG” also goes off. After the text message goes off from the display, pushing the “MSG” button during message reception shows the text message again on the display. The RDS audio system can store three messages consisting of 64 characters in memory. To store a message in memory, push the “MSG” button until you hear a beep. If three messages are already stored in memory, the oldest message will be overwritten by the new message. 178 AUDIO Cassette tape player operation (a) Playing a cassette tape 22sa16 22sa11 If a cassette is already in the slot, push the ”TAPE” button. When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should face to the right. The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette tape. At this time, ”TAPE” appears on the display. If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the cassette player, the player will automatically recognize it and ”METAL” appears on the display. To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the ”EJECT” button. Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding. Dolby Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a tape that was recorded with Dolby* Noise Reduction, push the ” button. The display will indicate that the Dolby noise “ reduction system is on. The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with the Dolby NR on or off according to the mode used for recording the tape. To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button again to turn off the Dolby NR. * Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. ”DOLBY” and the double–D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 179 AUDIO (b) Manual program selection 22sa19 ”Program” button: Push the ” 
” button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side is currently selected ( indicates top side,  indicates bottom side). ”Rewind” button: Push the ”” button to rewind a tape. ”REW” appears on the display. To stop rewinding, push the same button or ”TAPE” button. ”Fast forward” button: Push the ”

” button to fast forward a cassette tape. ”FF” appears on the display. To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or ”TAPE” button. 180 (c) Automatic program selection 22sa21a ”RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the current program. Push the ”RPT” button while the program is playing. When the program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed. Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature. There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between programs for the repeat feature to work correctly. ”SKIP” button: The skip feature allows you to fast forward past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at the end of cassettes. Push the ”SKIP” button. The player will automatically skip any blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next program. To cancel it, push the button once again. AUDIO Push this button on the lower side to skip backward. Push the button until ”REW” and the number you want to skip appear on the display. 22sa20  If you set ”REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning of the current program.  When counting the number of programs you want to rewind, remember to count the current program as well. For example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before the song you are listening to, push this button until ”REW 3” appears on the display. ”Automatic program selection” button: The automatic program selection feature allows you to program your cassette player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time. When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player automatically resumes normal play. Push this button on the upper side to skip forward. ”FF” and the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the player will automatically skip forward. ”RPT”, ”SKIP” or ”Automatic program selection” features: These features may not work well with some spoken word, live or classical recordings. There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between programs for this feature to work correctly. When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 181 AUDIO Compact disc player operation If you need to insert the next disc, repeat the same procedure to insert another disc. (a) Inserting or ejecting compact discs  Setting all the discs: The ignition switch must be in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position. 1. Push the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep. Your changer can store up to 6 discs. The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and “WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the CD door opens. 2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open. 22sa22 The CD door closes and “WAIT” appears again. 3. Insert the next disc after the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD” and the CD door opens. 4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the discs. To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD” or “DISC” button.  Setting a single compact disc: 1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly. The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and “WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the CD door opens. 2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open. You can set a disc at the lowest empty disc number. After insertion, the set disc is automatically loaded. If the label faces down, the disc cannot be played. In this case, ”ERROR1” and disc number appear on the display. 182 If you do not insert the discs within 15 seconds after pushing the “LOAD” button and “LOAD” is displayed, the operation will be canceled automatically. NOTICE Do not insert one disc stacked on top of another one or feed them in continuously, to prevent discs from getting stuck in the player. AUDIO (b) Playing a compact disc 22sa23a 22sa24  Ejecting a single disc alone: 1. Push the ” ” or ” ” button to display the disc number you want to eject. Push the ”DISC” button if the discs are already loaded in the player. 2. Push the ”EJECT” button for the compact disc briefly. ”CD” appears on the display. At this time, the display shows “EJECT” and the indicators at both ends of the slot as well as disc number light up. The discs set in the player are played continuously, starting with the last disc you inserted. The disc number of the disc currently being played, the track number and the time from the beginning of the program appear on the display.  Ejecting all the discs: Push the “EJECT” button for the compact disc until you hear a beep. When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc starts again. The player will skip any empty disc trays. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 183 AUDIO (c) Selecting a desired disc 22sa25 (d) Searching for a desired track or disc 22sa26 Searching for a desired disc: Searching for a desired track: Push the ” ” or ” ” button to select the disc number. Push the “SCAN” button briefly. ”SCAN” will appear on the display. The compact disc player will play the next track for 10 seconds, then scan again. To select a track, push the ”SCAN” button a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc, it will continue scanning at track 1. Push the button several times until the desired disc number appears on the display. When you release the button, the player will start playing the selected disc from the first track. After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play resumes. Searching for a desired disc: Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. With ”D.SCAN” on the display, the program at the beginning of each disc will be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice, push the button a second time. After all the discs in the changer are scanned in one pass, the scan function is cancelled. 184 AUDIO (e) Selecting a desired track 22sa27 ”TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track. Push either side of the ”TRACK” button several times until the desired track number appears on the display. As you release the button, the player will start playing the selected track from the beginning. ”Fast forward” button: Push the ”

” button and hold it to fast forward the disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing from that position. ”Reverse” button: Push the ”” button and hold it to reverse the disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing. (f) Repeating a track or a disc 22sa28a ”RPT” button: There are 2 repeat features — you can either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc. Repeating a track: Push the ”RPT” button briefly while the track is playing. ”RPT” will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature. Repeating a disc: Push the ”RPT” button and hold it until you hear a beep. ”D.RPT” will appear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the top track of the disc and replay. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 185 AUDIO (g) Random playing (h) If the player malfunctions If the player or another unit equipped with the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the four following error messages. 22sa17b If “WAIT” appears on the display, it indicates that the inside of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient temperature. Remove the disc from the player and allow the player to cool down. If “ERROR 1” appears on the display, it indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. ”RAND” button: There are 2 random features — you can either listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the player in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a specific compact disc in random order. Random playing for the tracks on a disc: Push the ”RAND” button briefly. ”RAND” will appear on the display and play the disc you are listening to in random order. Random playing for all the tracks in the changer: Push the ”RAND” button and hold it until you hear a beep. ”D.RAND” will appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the changer in random order. To turn off the random feature, push ”RAND” a second time. When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the button to reset. 186 If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appears on the display, it indicates there is trouble inside the system. Eject the disc. If the malfunction is not rectified, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. AUDIO Steering pad switches “” or “” switch: The function in each mode is shown below. (a) When the radio mode is selected  Push this switch briefly to select a station that you assigned to a switch on the audio system. 22sa18b  Push this switch and hold it until you hear a beep. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station and stop on reception. (b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected The steering pad switches are installed on the left side of the steering wheel. “MODE” switch: Push the “MODE” switch to select an audio mode. Each push changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to use. When you push the switch briefly with the audio system turned off, the audio system turns on. To turn off the audio system, push the switch and hold it until you hear a beep. “VOL” switches: Push “ ” to increase the volume and “ ” to decrease the volume. The volume continues to increase or decrease while the switch is being pressed. “SET” switch: Push the “SET” switch to change to the preset volume. To preset the volume, adjust the volume and push the switch until you hear a beep.  Push this switch briefly for automatic program selection. In automatic program selection, you can skip up to 9 programs at a time. For details, see page 180 for details.  Push this switch until you hear a beep to fast forward or rewind the tape. To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push the same side on the switch. (c) When the “CD” mode is selected  Push this switch briefly to select a desired track.  To select a desired disc, push and hold this switch until you hear a beep. CAUTION Operate the steering pad switches with due care while you are driving to avoid accidents. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 187 AUDIO Car audio system operating hints NOTICE To ensure correct audio system operations:  Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio system.  Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or compact disc into the cassette tape slot or compact disc slot.  The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. Radio reception Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with your radio – it is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle. For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as your vehicle moves. Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio: 188 FM Fading and drifting stations – Generally, the effective range of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion. Multi–path – FM signals are reflective, making it possible for two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception. Static and fluttering – These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering. Station swapping – If the FM signal you are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again. AUDIO AM Fading – AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphere – especially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak. Station interference – When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast. Static – AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static. Caring for your cassette player and tapes For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:  Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening to it, especially if it is hot outside.  Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.  Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than 100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the cassette player. Caring for your compact disc player and discs  Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.  Extremely high temperature can keep your compact disc player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc. Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.  Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your compact disc player skip.  A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is recommended.)  If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not hear any sound even though your compact disc player appears to be working. Eject all discs from the player and wait until the player dries. Use high–quality cassettes:  Low–quality cassette tapes can cause many problems, including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and constant auto–reversing. They can also get stuck or tangled in the cassette player.  Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling off. CAUTION Compact disc players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 189 AUDIO 20L037  Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your compact disc player. Copy–protected CD CD–R (CD–Recordable) CD–RW (CD–Re–writable) CD–ROM 22sv01
Special shaped discs 22sv02
Low quality discs 190 AUDIO 22sv03
Labeled discs 20L038
Correct NOTICE To prevent damage to the player or changer , do not use special shaped, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illustrations.
Wrong  Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you set them into the player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side.  Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.) 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 191 AUDIO 20L039 To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint–free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti–static device. 192 SECTION 3–1 STARTING AND DRIVING Starting and driving Three–way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic throttle control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 194 195 196 196 197 198 199 205 206 209 210 212 216 217 225 193 STARTING AND DRIVING THREE–WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS NOTICE A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the three–way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other damage, observe the following precautions:  Use only unleaded gasoline. 31sa03  Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three–way catalytic converter.  Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more than 20 minutes. Three–way catalytic converters are emission control devices installed in the exhaust system. The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas. CAUTION  Keep people and combustible materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.  Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or rags. 194  Avoid racing the engine.  Do not push–start or pull–start your vehicle.  Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is moving.  Keep your engine in good running order. Malfunctions in the engine electrical system, electronic ignition system or fuel system could cause an extremely high three–way catalytic converter temperature. STARTING AND DRIVING  If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, take your vehicle in for a check–up as soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle and its three–way catalytic converter system best.  To ensure that the three–way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION CAUTION  Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.  Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose connections. The system should be checked from time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked immediately.  Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this a particularly dangerous situation.  Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.  Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. An open or unsealed trunk lid may cause exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 195 STARTING AND DRIVING  To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions. IGNITION SWITCH WITH STEERING LOCK  If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with the windows open and the trunk lid closed. Have the cause immediately located and corrected. BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE 31sa04 1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it. 2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, head restraint height and steering wheel angle. 3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors. 4. Lock all doors. ”START” – Starter motor on. The key will return to the ”ON” position when released. 5. Fasten seat belts. For starting tips, see page 198. Remember to check that the service reminder indicators function when turning the ignition switch to ”ON”, and check the fuel gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel. ”ON” – Engine on and all accessories on. This is the normal driving position. NOTICE Do not leave the ignition switch in the ”ON” position if the engine is not running. The battery will discharge and the electronic ignition system could be damaged. 196 STARTING AND DRIVING ”ACC” – Accessories such as the radio operate, but the engine is off. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the ignition switch only to ”ACC”. If you leave the key in the ”ACC” or ”LOCK” position and open the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.* PARKING BRAKE NOTE: *The volume or interval of beep sound can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 31sa06b 31sa05 ”LOCK” – Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked. The ignition key can be removed only at this position. 1 To set: Fully depress the parking brake pedal. 2 To release: Pull the parking brake release lever. Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake. To turn the ignition switch from ”ACC” to the ”LOCK” position, you must put the transmission selector lever in the ”P” position. CAUTION Once you remove the key, the engine immobiliser system is automatically set. See ”Engine immobiliser system” on page 11. Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully released and that the parking brake reminder light is off. When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the ”LOCK” position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while turning the key gently. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 197 STARTING AND DRIVING HOW TO START THE ENGINE Before cranking 1. Apply the parking brake firmly. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories. 3. Put the selector lever in ”P”. If you need to restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in ”N”. A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the selector lever is in any drive position. 4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving off. Starting the engine Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in ”Before cranking”. Normal starting procedure The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your engine automatically controls the proper air–fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot engine as follows: 198 With your foot off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by turning the ignition switch to ”START”. Release it when the engine starts. Engine should be warmed up by driving, not in idle. For warming up drive with smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range. If the engine stalls ... Simply restart it , using the correct procedure given in normal starting. If the engine will not start See ”If your vehicle will not start” on page 234. NOTICE  Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.  Do not race a cold engine.  If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately. STARTING AND DRIVING AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This means you can only shift out of ”P” position when the brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch in ”ON” position. ()
The shift position is displayed on the instrument cluster. P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position R: Reverse position N: Neutral position D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive possible) 4: Position for engine braking (Shifting into overdrive not possible) 31sa07 When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from ”D” to ”4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 208. 3, 2: Position for more powerful engine braking L: Position for maximum engine braking 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 199 STARTING AND DRIVING Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in the following parts. (a) Normal driving (a) Normal driving (b) Using engine braking (c) Using the ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions (d) Backing up (e) Parking 31sa08 (f) Good driving practice (g) If you cannot shift the selector lever
1 ”P” (Park) position 2 ”N” (Neutral) position 1. Start the engine as instructed in ”How to start the engine” on page 198. The transmission must be in ”P” or ”N”. The engine will not start in any drive position even if the ignition switch is turned to ”START”. 200 STARTING AND DRIVING 31sa09b
1 Power position 3 Snow position 2 Normal position 2. Set the driving pattern selector switch to the ”Normal” position. 31sa10
1 Brake pedal 2 ”D” (Drive) position 4. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to ”D”. Your transmission has a driving pattern selector switch which allows you to select ”Power”, ”Normal” or ”Snow” mode to suit your driving condition. For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends that you use the ”Normal” position to improve fuel economy. Always use the ”D” position to improve fuel economy and quiet driving. Only in this position, shifting into the overdrive gear is possible. However, while the engine coolant temperature is low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even in the ”D” position. (See ”(b) Using engine braking” and ”(f) Good driving practice” for exceptions.) 3. For more powerful acceleration and sporty driving, use the ”Power” position. CAUTION In the ”Power” position, the ”ECT PWR” light in the instrument cluster is on and the transmission is shifted up at higher vehicle speeds and shifted down more responsively than in the ”Normal” position. Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting. For ”Snow” mode, see ”Electronic Throttle Control System” on page 205. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 201 STARTING AND DRIVING 5. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting. (b) Using engine braking In normal cruising, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift up to the most suitable gear. On inclines, declines or winding roads, etc., the vehicle shifts up and down automatically according to the running conditions to obtain the suitable driving power and engine braking. 31sa11 When the lever is in the ”4” position, the automatic transmission system will select the most suitable gear for the running conditions such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc. If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, depress the accelerator pedal to the full throttle position. This provides more acceleration by automatically downshifting the transmission to the next lower gear or beyond, depending on the vehicle speed. If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill, see ”(b) Using engine braking”. To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the transmission in the way described below: 1 Shift into the ”4” position. The transmission will downshift to fourth gear and engine braking will be obtained. When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from ”D” to ”4”, engine braking will not be applied because the cruise control is not cancelled. If you need to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 208. 2 202 Shift into the ”3” position. The transmission will downshift to third gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than 137 km/h (85 mph) and more powerful engine braking will be obtained. STARTING AND DRIVING 3 4 Shift into the ”2” position. The transmission will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than 82 km/h (51 mph) and more powerful engine braking than that of ”3” position will be obtained. (c) Using the ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions Shift into the ”L” position. The transmission will downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than 39 km/h (24 mph) and maximum engine braking will be applied. With the selector lever in ”3”, ”2” or ”L”, you can start the vehicle in motion as with the lever in ”D”. The ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions are used for strong engine braking as described previously. With the selector lever in ”3” or ”2”, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift to third or second gear. CAUTION With the selector lever in ”L”, the transmission is engaged in first gear. Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface. The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the vehicle to spin or skid. NOTICE  Be careful not to over–rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the red zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is given below for your reference: ”3” . . . 147 km/h ”2” . . . . 96 km/h ”L” . . . . 62 km/h (92 mph) (60 mph) (39 mph)  Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long time in the ”3”, ”2” or ”L” position. This may cause severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To prevent such damage, ”4” position should be used in hill climbing or hard towing. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 203 STARTING AND DRIVING (d) Backing up (e) Parking 31sa12
1 Brake pedal 2 ”R” (Reverse) position 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the ”R” position. NOTICE Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving. When you are backing up, you can adjust the outside rear view mirrors down quickly. For details, see page 101. 204 31sa13
1 Brake pedal 2 Parking brake pedal 3 ”P” (Park) position 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Depress the parking brake pedal fully. 3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the ”P” position. CAUTION Never attempt to move the selector lever into ”P” under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may result. STARTING AND DRIVING (f) Good driving practice If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between fourth and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope, shift the selector lever to the ”4” position. Be sure to shift the selector lever to the ”D” position after climbing the slope. ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM The electronic throttle control system always maintains appropriate engine output in relation to the accelerator opening in all driving conditions. CAUTION Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. 31sa09b NOTICE Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission to overheat. (g) If you cannot shift the selector lever If you cannot shift the selector lever even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For instructions, see ”If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever” on page 270.
1 Power position 3 Snow position 2 Normal position The electronic throttle control system has 3 modes: Normal, Power and Snow modes. Normal mode: For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends that you use the normal mode to improve fuel economy. Power mode: For more powerful acceleration and sporty driving. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 205 STARTING AND DRIVING In the power mode, the ”ECT PWR” light in the instrument cluster is on and the transmission is shifted up at higher vehicle speeds and shifted down more responsively than in the normal mode. To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector switch lightly on the ”SNOW” side. Snow mode: For slippery road surfaces such as in snow. In this mode, the spinning of the rear wheels is controlled appropriately. When you push the driving pattern selector switch on the ”SNOW” side, the snow mode is turned on and the ”ECT SNOW” light in the instrument cluster comes on. To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector switch on the ”SNOW” side again. When you turn the ignition switch off in the snow mode, the mode automatically changes to the normal mode. CRUISE CONTROL The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a desired speed over 40 km/h (25 mph) with your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your cruising speed can be maintained although a slight speed change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, a great speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise control. When the cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the automatic transmission is fixed in the normal position, regardless of the position of the selector switch. CAUTION  To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle, do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow–covered) or winding roads.  Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise control then downshift the transmission to use engine braking to slow down. 206 STARTING AND DRIVING Turning the system on Setting operation 31sa14 To operate the cruise control, push the main switch. This turns the system on. The indicator light in the instrument cluster shows that you can now set your desired cruising speed. Another push on the switch will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is turned off, the main switch is also automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again, push the main switch again to turn it on. CAUTION To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the main switch off when not using the cruise control. 31sa15
Each function is described below. 1 Setting at a desired speed. The transmission must be in ”D” or “4” before you set the cruise control speed. Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration – for example, when passing – depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior to the acceleration. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 207 STARTING AND DRIVING 2 Cancelling the preset speed You can cancel the preset speed by either of the following: a. Pulling the control lever in the ”CANCEL” direction. b. Depressing the brake pedal. If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will be automatically cancelled. If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled. If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than these reasons, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity. 3 Resetting to a faster speed Press the control lever upward in the ”RES/ACC” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain speed. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever upward in the ”RES/ACC” direction quickly within 0.6 seconds. However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then press the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction. 208 4 Resetting to a slower speed Press the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held downward, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction quickly within 0.6 seconds. However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then press the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction. Even if you downshift the transmission from ”D” position to ”4” with the cruise control on, engine braking will not be applied because the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled. 5 Resuming the preset speed If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever or by depressing the brake pedal or vehicle stability control activation, pushing the lever up in the ”RES/ACC” direction will restore the speed set prior to cancellation. However, once the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will not be resumed. STARTING AND DRIVING Cruise control failure warning If the ”CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes when using the cruise control, push the main switch to turn the system off and then push it again to turn it on. If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise control system. TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM The traction control system automatically helps control the spinning of the rear wheels which may occur when accelerating on slippery road surfaces, thus assisting driver to control the driving power of the rear wheels.  The indicator light does not come on.  The indicator light flashes again.  The indicator light goes out after it comes on. If this is the case, contact your Lexus dealer and have your Lexus inspected. 31sa16a
Slip indicator light When you turn the ignition switch on, this system always turns on. Leave the system on during ordinary driving so that it can operate when needed. When traction control is applied, the slip indicator light blinks. You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the traction control system is in the self–check mode, and does not indicate malfunction. When the traction control system is operating, you may feel vibration of your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is functioning properly. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 209 STARTING AND DRIVING When getting the vehicle out of mud or new snow, etc. the traction control system will help operate to prevent the wheels from spinning. To turn off the traction control system, see page 211. CAUTION Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and power to the rear wheels cannot be maintained, even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which will cause the vehicle to lose traction. In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious pace. VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM The vehicle stability control system helps provide integrated control of the systems such as an anti–lock brake system, traction control, engine control, etc. This system automatically controls the output of the brakes or engine to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road surface or abrupt steering wheel operation occurs. 31sa16a
Slip indicator light If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light flashes and an alarm sounds intermittently. The vehicle stability control activates when the vehicle speed is about more than 15 km/h (9 mph). 210 STARTING AND DRIVING You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the vehicle stability control is in the self–check mode and does not indicate a malfunction. 31sa17b You can turn off the vehicle stability control system by pushing the ”VSC OFF” switch. The ”VSC OFF” indicator comes on. At this time, the traction control system also turns off. You cannot turn off either one of them. Pushing the ”VSC OFF” switch a second time turns the system back on and extinguishes the ”VSC OFF” indicator light. When you turn the ignition switch on, this system always turns on. Vehicle stability control system failure warning 31sa18a These lights warn when there is a problem somewhere in the vehicle stability control system or traction control system. If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come on, have your vehicle checked by Lexus dealer as soon as possible. The lights will come on when the ignition switch is turned to ”ON”, and will go off after about a few seconds. The lights may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after a while. Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights. It is normal if they go out after a few seconds. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 211 STARTING AND DRIVING If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come on, the vehicle stability control system does not activate, however, it is no problem to continue your driving. CAUTION  Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability control system. Even if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always drive carefully and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator light flashes, sounding an alarm, special care should be taken while driving.  Only use tires of specified size. The size, manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires should be the same. If you use the tires other than specified, or different type or size, the vehicle stability control system may not function correctly. When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your Lexus dealer. BRAKE SYSTEM This brake system has 2 independent hydraulic circuits. If either circuit should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also, the brake system warning light may come on. CAUTION Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately. Brake booster The brake booster uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump to power–assist the brakes. If the brake booster fails during driving, the brake system warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work properly. If they do not work well, depress the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system warning light comes on, immediately stop your vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer. The brake system warning light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if the light turns off after a while. Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the brake system warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light goes out and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds. 212 STARTING AND DRIVING You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction. The anti–lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). CAUTION Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti–lock brake system.  Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the pedal uses up your brake fluid pressure reserve.  Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still work. But you will have to push the pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will increase. You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the anti–lock brake system is in the self–check mode, and does not indicate a malfunction. Anti–lock brake system When the anti–lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system: The anti–lock brake system is designed to automatically help prevent lock–up of the wheels during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under these circumstances.  You may hear the anti–lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped. Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the anti–lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the anti–lock brake system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.  At the end of the anti–lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may move a little forward. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 213 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION  Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road. Do not overestimate the anti–lock brake system: Although the anti–lock brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with the anti–lock brake system on. Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate pressure: The anti–lock brake system detects vehicle speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting in a longer stopping distance. If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the anti–lock brake system does not provide vehicle control. Anti–lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Compared with vehicles without an anti–lock brake system, your vehicle may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:  Driving on rough, gravel or snow–covered roads.  Driving with tire chains installed. 214  Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height. STARTING AND DRIVING ”ABS” warning light If either of the following conditions occur, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.  The light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on. 31sa19a  The light comes on while you are driving. A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. CAUTION The light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again. When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system, the brake assist system, the traction control system and/or the vehicle stability control system do/does not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally. When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. In this case, not only the anti–lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. Either of the following conditions may occur, but does not indicate a malfunction:  The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the engine is started. It is normal if it turns off after a while.  Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 215 STARTING AND DRIVING Drum–in–disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum–in–disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding–down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced. BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT INDICATORS Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding–down. Brake assist system If you slam the brakes on such as in an emergency, the brake assist system provides more powerful braking. If you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction. The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). The brake assist system may not work for about 60 seconds after the engine is started. For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS” warning light on page 45 or 215. 216 31sa20 The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to the extent that replacement is required. If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed. STARTING AND DRIVING TIRE INFORMATION This vehicle can be equipped with either run–flat tires (RFT) or standard tires. You can continue driving on the vehicle with run–flat tires even if any tire goes flat. It is able to run for a maximum of 160 km (100 miles) at a speed below 90 km/h (55 mph) after the low tire pressure warning light blinks and chimes sound. When you drive your vehicle after the low tire pressure warning light blinks and chimes sound, the tire must be replaced. Do not use the repaired tire. A spare tire is not provided on the vehicle with run–flat tires. The tire pressure warning system is equipped to warn you of the low tire pressure. A spare tire is not provided on the vehicle equipped with run–flat tires. Confirm whether your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire or not. If you have a flat tire, you have to take a different action depending on whether the tires are standard tires or run–flat tires. Run–flat tires characteristics: The vehicle with run–flat tires allows you to continue driving for up to 160 km (100 miles) at the moderate speed and do not ever exceed 90 km/h (55 mph) even with a flat tire. After such usage, the tire must be replaced. If you are not sure, consult your Lexus dealer. If you have a flat tire, decrease the speed and drive at lower speed to reduce the extent to which the tire is damaged. However, in some conditions (such as at high temperatures), you could not continue driving for up to 160 km (100 miles). The use of non–genuine wheels may prohibit optimum performance. 31sa01b The run–flat tires equipped on this vehicle are ones dedicated for SC430. Do not use them on another model. Do not mix run–flat tires with standard tires. The tire warranty book covers the detailed information on run–flat tires. For details, see the tire warranty book. A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall of the run–flat tire. If you cannot distinguish between the standard tire and run–flat tire, consult Lexus dealer. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 217 STARTING AND DRIVING Tire pressure warning system This warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire pressure will turn off the warning light. For details about adjusting the tire pressure, see “Checking tire pressure” on page 321. Vehicles with run–flat tires: 31sa02b This light and chimes warn you that the tire pressure is low. This light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes off after a few seconds. This means the low tire pressure warning light is operating properly. If the warning light does not go off, or comes on or blinks during driving, or the chimes sound, this indicates that air pressure is low. Make sure there is no flat tire. If the warning light comes on again even after air is put in the tires, a tire may be flat or the system may be malfunctioning. If this warning light comes on, the action you must take is different depending on the type of tires used. If you drive over about 180 km/h (112 mph) with the tires not inflated at the designated pressure for high speed driving, the warning light may turn on. If the tires are at the designated pressure for ordinary speed driving, decreasing the speed will turn off the warning light. (For the designated pressure for high speed driving, see “Specifications” on page 318.) 218 If the warning light is on, the tire pressure is lower than specified. Stop your vehicle at a safe place as soon as possible and check that the tire pressure is as specified on the tire pressure label. The air pressure gauge is located in the tool bag. If the warning light comes on or blinks even after tire pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. If you cannot verify the tire pressure soon, go to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer at the moderate speed and do not ever exceed 90 km/h (55 mph) and have all your vehicle’s tires checked and adjusted. And whether there is a flat tire or not should be also checked at this time. If any tire must be replaced, see “If you have a flat tire” on page 239. If the warning light does not go off about more than 15 minutes after air is put in the deflated tire, the system might be malfunctioning. Consult your Lexus dealer. STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION If the warning light blinks and chimes sound every few minutes, the tire pressure is very low. If the warning light comes on, take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer, tire dealer or gas station as soon as possible, observing the following instructions: Decrease your speed as soon as possible and take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer at a speed below 90 km/h (55 mph).  Decelerate as soon as possible to the most appropriate speed that conditions permit. Do not drive over 90 km/h (55 mph). When you drive your vehicle after the low tire pressure warning light blinks and chimes sound, the tire must be replaced. Do not use the repaired tire.  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury. CAUTION  The warning system may not activate immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage should occur. If the warning light blinks and chimes sound, take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible, observing the following instructions:  Decelerate as soon as possible to the most appropriate speed that conditions permit. Do not drive for longer than 160 km (100 miles) or over 90 km/h (55 mph).  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury.  The warning system may not activate immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage should occur. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 219 STARTING AND DRIVING NOTICE  Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as air pressure sensors will be damaged.  Take due care not to go over a curb stone and be careful of the holes in the road because deflated tire pressure affects tire cushion performance. The wheels, tires, body, suspension and other components could be damaged.  Your ground clearance is reduced if the run–flat tire goes flat so avoid driving over obstacles and drive slowly on rough, unpaved roads and speed bumps. Also, do not attempt to go through an automatic car wash as the vehicle may get caught, resulting in damage.  When the tires must be replaced, have them replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure sensor will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.  When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for air pressure sensors as well. Vehicles with standard tires: If the warning light is on, the tire pressure is lower than specified. Stop your vehicle at a safe place as soon as possible and check that the tire pressure is as specified on the tire pressure label. The air pressure gauge is located in the tool bag. If the warning light comes on or blinks even after tire pressure adjustment, it is probable that you may be a flat tire. If the tire goes flat, change to the spare tire. (See page 241). The spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure sensor. So, the warning light remains on even if the spare tire is mounted. If the warning light does not go off more than 15 minutes after air is put in the deflated tire, the system might be malfunctioning. Consult your Lexus dealer. CAUTION If the warning light comes on, observe the following instructions:  Decelerate as soon as possible to the most appropriate speed that conditions permit.  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury. 220 STARTING AND DRIVING If the warning light blinks and chimes sound every few minutes, the tire pressure is very low. Stop your vehicle at a safe place as soon as possible and check that the tire pressure is as specified on the tire pressure label. The air pressure gauge is located in the tool bag. Locate the deflated tire and change to the spare tire. For the procedure for changing the tire, see “If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with standard tires)” on page 241. The spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure sensor. So, the warning light remains on even if the spare tire is mounted. CAUTION NOTICE  Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as air pressure sensors will be damaged.  When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have them repaired or replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure sensors will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.  When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for air pressure sensors as well. System malfunction If the warning light blinks and chimes sound, observe the following instructions: The warning light comes on if the system does not work properly.  Decelerate as soon as possible to the most appropriate speed that conditions permit. The system will be disabled in the conditions below:  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury.  The warning system may not activate immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage should occur.  Electric devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.  If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use.  Much snowflakes or ice gets on the vehicle, in particular, around the wheels or wheel housings.  The sensor battery is expired.  The tires not equipped with air pressure sensor are used.  Although the tires are equipped with air pressure sensors, the selector switch (see page 224) is set to other tire setting. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 221 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION  The use of non–genuine wheels will cause the air pressure sensors to transmit the electronic code in different manner, resulting in the failure of the system.  The use of different type of tires with genuine wheels may also cause the malfunction of the system. INFORMATION If the chains are installed, the air pressure warning system may not operate properly. For vehicles sold in U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 222 STARTING AND DRIVING  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Replacing tires and wheels As you might have difficulty in locating a flat or deflated tire, an air pressure warning system should be installed on the tires of this vehicle. When replacing the wheels, be sure to install air pressure sensors on the wheels. There are 3 ways to set up the air pressure sensors: a. Remove the sensor from the old wheel and install it to the new wheel. b. Keep the same wheel with air pressure sensor and replace the tire alone. c. Use a new wheel and sensor. You have to register an ID code for a new sensor. Up to 2 sets of codes can be registered. As one ID for the originally installed sensor is registered at “MAIN” of the selector switch, use the “2nd” position to register an ID for the new sensor. You do not need to re–register the ID code for any other replacements. For the use of the originally installed tires, put the selector switch at “MAIN” and for the use of tires set purchased later, put the switch at “2nd”. For the sensor selector switch, see page 224. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 223 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION Selector switch  Have the tires, wheels or sensors replaced and ID codes registered by Lexus dealer. If you need sensors, purchase from Lexus dealer.  The use of non–genuine wheels will cause the air pressure sensors to transmit the electronic code in different manner, resulting in the failure of the system. 31sa21a
1 Main position 2 2nd position The selector switch is located on the right side in the glove box. The ID code is given in the sender built in the air pressure sensor. To activate the air pressure warning system, it is necessary to register the ID code of the sender on the selector switch in the vehicle. 2 sets of ID codes can be registered. The code of the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered on the switch at “MAIN”. Have a new tires set with new air pressure sensors registered at “2nd” by Lexus dealer. ID codes should be registered by Lexus dealer. Once registered, change the setting position each time you purchase tires and wheels. Re–registration is not required. When purchasing new tires, consult your Lexus dealer. 224 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION When the tires whose ID code is registered at “MAIN” are used, the system does not work properly with the selector switch set at “2nd”. If the tires whose ID code is registered at “2nd” are stored nearby, the system will detect their tire pressure (and vice versa). Liquid sealants for flat tires NOTICE Do not use liquid sealants for flat tires as the air pressure sensors will be damaged. TYPES OF TIRES Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped with. 1. Summer tires Summer tires are high–speed capability tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow–covered or icy roads. For driving on snow–covered or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. 2. All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use all year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 225 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION  Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.  Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels of the sizes different from the originals. 226 SECTION 3–2 STARTING AND DRIVING Driving tips Break–in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditionss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 228 228 228 229 230 231 231 227 DRIVING TIPS BREAK–IN PERIOD Drive gently and avoid high speeds. You need not follow a break–in schedule with your new Lexus. But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:
Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.
Avoid racing the engine.
Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).
Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast or slow. OPERATION IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country ... First, comply with the vehicle registration laws. Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane rating). 228 TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS CONDITIONS
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you much better control.
Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle. Avoid driving onto high, sharp–edged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage such as a tire burst. Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe damage to the tires and/or wheels.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking brake, and place the transmission in ”P”. If necessary, block the wheels.
Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly. If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance. DRIVING TIPS
Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is fully released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.
Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle securely.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running. WINTER DRIVING TIPS CAUTION
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear, and poor fuel economy. Make sure your coolant is properly protected against freezing.
To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes excessively, they may overheat and not work properly. See page 202. Your coolant must contain ethylene–glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. Use “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent. See ”Checking the engine coolant level” on page 311 for instructions.
Be careful when accelerating, upshifting, downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden acceleration or engine braking, could cause the vehicle to spin or skid.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle has high–speed capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high–speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds. NOTICE Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone. When it is extremely cold, we recommend to use 60% solution for your Lexus, to provide protection down to about –50C (–58F). Do not use more than 70% solution for better coolant performance. Check the condition of the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter starting. Page 336 tells you how to visually inspect the battery. Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to check the battery charge level. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 229 DRIVING TIPS Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold weather. See page 310 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call your Lexus dealer – they will be pleased to help. Check the electronic ignition system for loose connections or obvious damage. Keep the door locks from freezing. Squirt lock de–icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from freezing. Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders. Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the fenders occasionally. Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you carry some emergency equipment. Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains, window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel, jumper cables, etc. DINGHY TOWING Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution. This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water. NOTICE 32sa01 Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint. Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility it could freeze. When parking, put the transmission into ”P” and block the front wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release. 230 Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome. DRIVING TIPS NOTICE Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to your vehicle. TRAILER TOWING 32sa02 HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER Improving fuel economy is easy – just take it easy. It will help make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:
Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check the pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel.
Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater fuel consumption.
Avoid lengthy warm–up idling. Once the engine is running smoothly, begin driving – but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may take a little longer.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts. Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. It is not designed for trailer towing.
Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start again later.
Avoid engine over–revving. Use a gear position suitable for the road on which you are traveling.
Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down. Stop–and–go driving wastes fuel. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 231 DRIVING TIPS
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear on your brakes.
Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.
Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption. CAUTION
Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel. Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your power steering and brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the emission control system operates properly only when the engine is running.
Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc. This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corrosion. 232
Keep your vehicle tuned–up and in top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more frequent maintenance. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.) SECTION 4 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY In case of an emergency If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase the engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire (vehicles with run–flat tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire (vehicles with standard tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If the retractable hardtop does not close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . Lexus link system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your keys or lock yourself out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 234 234 238 238 239 241 249 250 256 270 271 281 233 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE DRIVING If your engine stalls while driving . . . . 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place. 2. Turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Try starting the engine again. If the engine will not start, see ”If your vehicle will not start”. CAUTION If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work, so steering and braking will be much harder than usual. IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT START (a) Simple checks Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure instructions in ”How to start the engine” on page 198 and that you have sufficient fuel. Since your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobiliser system, also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, there may be a malfunction in the immobiliser system. Call your Lexus dealer. See ”Keys” on page 8. If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too slowly – 1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean. 2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light. 3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked, the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See ”(c) Jump starting” for further instruction. If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.) 234 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (b) Starting a flooded engine NOTICE Do not pull–or push–start the vehicle. It may damage the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts. Also the three–way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard. If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not start – 1. The engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking. See ”(b) Starting a flooded engine” for further instructions. 2. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.) If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking. If this happens, turn the ignition switch to ”START” with the accelerator pedal fully depressed. Continue this operation for 30 seconds and then stop cranking. Then try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal. If the engine does not start after 30 seconds of cranking, release the ignition switch, wait a few minutes and try again. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.) NOTICE Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems. (c) Jump starting To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic components, these instructions must be followed precisely. If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.) 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 235 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY CAUTION  Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.  If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and flush the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while en route to the medical office.  The gas normally produced by a battery will explode if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or light a match while jump starting. 40sv02  Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. NOTICE The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you are sure that the booster battery is correct. 236
5 Discharged battery 6 Booster battery JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE 1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.) If the booster battery is an extended maintenance interval battery, it is not necessary to remove the vent plugs. 3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed. 4. Locate positive (+) and negative (–) terminals of each battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2 3 4 ) shown in the illustration. 1 Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. 2 Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. 3 Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative (–) terminal of the booster battery. 4 Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black) cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (such as shown in the illustration) away from the battery. Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked. CAUTION When making the connections, to avoid serious injury, do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground. 5. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed. 6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order: the negative cable and then the positive cable. 7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may now contain sulfuric acid. 8. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your Lexus dealer. NOTICE When disconnecting the battery, be sure to cancel the theft deterrent system. Otherwise, the system could activate an alarm and lock the unlocked door(s) automatically. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 237 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU CANNOT INCREASE THE ENGINE SPEED If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, the electronic throttle control system may be faulty. Move the vehicle to a safe place by means of creeping and call a Lexus dealer for assistance: 1. Depress the brake pedal and shift to the “D” position. 2. Gradually release the brake pedal, and the vehicle starts to move by creeping. After arriving at a safe place, stop the vehicle and call a Lexus dealer for assistance. CAUTION IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has probably overheated. When the engine overheats Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency flashers. Put the transmission in ”P” and apply the parking brake. A: If steam is coming from your engine: Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance.  The above method of moving the vehicle is for emergency. Use it only for moving minimum distances to a safe place. CAUTION  Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation. To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of very high pressure. B: If no steam is coming from your engine: Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning. Check the following.  Is the cooling fan operating?  Is the coolant in the acceptable range?  Is the engine drive belt O.K.? 238 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY CAUTION  When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.  Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out under pressure. If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus dealer. If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your vehicle. If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible by your Lexus dealer. IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (Vehicles with run–flat tires) 31sa01b You can continue driving a vehicle with run–flat tires even if any tire goes flat. It is able to run for a maximum of 160 km (100 miles) at a speed below 90 km/h (55 mph) after the low tire pressure warning light blinks and chimes sound. When you drive your vehicle after the low tire pressure warning light blinks and chimes sound, the tire must be replaced. Do not use the repaired tire. A spare tire is not provided on the vehicle with run–flat tires. Observe the following precautions and take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 239 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY CAUTION NOTICE If the low tire pressure warning light comes on or blinks and chimes sound, take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible, observing the following instructions:  Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as air pressure sensors will be damaged.  Decelerate as soon as possible to the most appropriate speed that conditions permit. Do not drive for longer than 160 km (100 miles) or over 90 km/h (55 mph).  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury.  Take due care not to go over a curb stone and be careful of the holes in the road because deflated tire pressure affects tire cushion performance. The wheels, tires, body, suspension and other components could be damaged.  Your ground clearance is reduced if the run–flat tire goes flat so avoid driving over obstacles and drive slowly on rough, unpaved roads and speed bumps. Also, do not attempt to go through an automatic car wash as the vehicle may get caught, resulting in damage.  When the tires must be replaced, have them replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure sensors will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.  When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for air pressure sensors as well. 240 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (Vehicles with standard tires) CAUTION When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury: CAUTION  Follow jacking instructions. If the low tire pressure warning light blinks and chimes sound, observe the following instructions:  Decelerate as soon as possible to the most appropriate speed that conditions permit.  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury.  The warning system may not activate immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage should occur. 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place – well away from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground. 2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in ”P”. 4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic. 5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.  Do not put any part of your body under a vehicle supported by a jack. Otherwise, personal injury may occur.  Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.  Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in ”P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.  Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.  Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.  Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing.  Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.  When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.  Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the tire. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 241 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE Compact spare tire  Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as air pressure sensors will be damaged.  Do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond repair.  When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have them repaired or replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure sensors will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.  When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for air pressure sensors as well. 40sa24a The compact spare tire is designed for temporary emergency use only. The compact spare tire is identified by the distinctive wheel design and color and special wording “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded into the side wall of the tire. To keep the compact spare tire noticeable, do not hide the wheel by a wheel cover or such. The compact spare tire saves space in your luggage compartment, and its lighter weight helps to improve fuel economy and permits easier installation in case of a flat tire. 242 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY The compact spare tire can be used many times, if necessary. It has tread life of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) depending on road conditions and your driving habits. When tread wear indicators appear on the tire, replace the tire. (See “Checking and replacing tires on page 323.) INFORMATION As the spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure sensor, low pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Changing procedure CAUTION  The compact spare tire was designed especially for your Lexus. Do not use it on any other vehicle.  Do not use more than one compact spare tire at the same time.  The pressure for the compact spare tire must be 420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi). 40sa27a  Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) when driving with the compact spare tire.  The standard tire should be repaired and reinstalled as soon as possible.  Avoid sudden acceleration, sudden deceleration and sharp turns with the compact spare tire. 2 Jack handle 3 Towing eyelet
1 Wrench 4 Allen wrench 5 Tool bag 6 Jack 7 Spare tire 1. Get the tool, jack and spare tire. NOTICE Your ground clearance is reduced when the compact spare tire is installed so avoid driving over obstacles and drive slowly on rough, unpaved roads and speed bumps. Also, do not attempt to go through an automatic car wash as the vehicle may get caught, resulting in damage. To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize yourself with the use of the jack and each tool, and their storage locations. The air pressure gauge is located in the tool bag. The Allen wrench under the tool bag is provided to close the retractable hardtop manually in case the retractable hardtop does not close. The towing eyelet is needed in emergency towing. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 243 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 40sa28a
1 Joint 2 When removing the jack, turn the joint by hand in the ”contract” direction until the jack is free. 3 When storing, turn the joint by hand in the ”expand” direction until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking. 244 40sa38b To remove the spare tire: 1 Remove the tire cover. 2 Loosen the bolt and remove it. When storing the spare tire, place it with the outer side of the wheel facing the inside of the vehicle. Then bolt the tire in place to prevent the tire from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 40sa29 40sa30a 2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels. 3. Loosen all the wheel nuts. Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them. To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so that the handle is on the right side, as shown above. Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip off the nut. Do not remove the nuts yet – just unscrew them about one–half turn. CAUTION Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 245 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 40sa31 4. Position the jack at the jack points as shown. Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid surface. 40sa32a 5. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise it high enough so that the spare tire can be installed. Allow for the fact that you need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tire than when removing the flat tire. To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, double–check that it is properly positioned. CAUTION Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone. 246 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 40sa33a 40sa35 6. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire. 7. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight. Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside. Align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts. Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much as you can by hand. Press the tire back and see if you can tighten them more. 40sa34a CAUTION Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels without good metal–to–metal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving. Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead to overtightening the nuts and damaging the bolts. The nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut, clean it. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 247 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY CAUTION 40sa36 8. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel nuts. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut. Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown. Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight. 248  When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons around will not be injured as the vehicle is lowered to the ground.  Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque wrench to 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.), as soon as possible after changing wheels. Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 9. After changing the wheel, check the air pressure of the replaced tire. Stow all the tools, jack and flat tire securely. Load the flat tire in the trunk with the retractable hardtop closed. If the pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive slowly to the nearest service station and fill to the correct pressure. Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and possibly cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, put a new one on as soon as possible. IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES STUCK If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc. then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Turn off the traction control system to become unstuck to allow the tires to spin enough to remove the vehicle from the obstruction. (For details, see “Vehicle stability control system” on page 210.) This is the same procedure for changing or rotating your tires. CAUTION CAUTION Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and flat tire are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking. Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 249 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE If you rock your vehicle, observe the following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other parts.  Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.  Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the wheels.  If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle several times, consider other ways such as towing. IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE TOWED If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service. In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using either (a) or (b). (a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck (b) Using a flat bed truck (c) Never tow with a sling type truck Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in ”(d) Emergency towing” on page 254. Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws pertaining to towing. Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly. Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver. TOWING PRECAUTIONS: Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use a towing dolly. 250 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY  From rear (a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck  From front 40sa43 40sa42 Place the ignition switch in the ”ACC” position. Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. NOTICE NOTICE Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission from the front with rear wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.  Do not tow with the key removed or in the ”LOCK” position, as the steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.  When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged during towing. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 251 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (b) Using a flat bed truck 40sa39 40sa44  Tie down points 40sa45 If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied down at locations A and B as shown above. 40sa40a
Rear emergency towing eyelets NOTICE Do not use the rear emergency towing eyelets. 252 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY  Tie down angle (c) Towing with a sling type truck 40sa46 40sa47 If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded black must be at 45. NOTICE Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may cause body damage. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 253 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (d) Emergency towing Towing in this manner may be done only on hard–surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition. CAUTION 40sa41 Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage. If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service. NOTICE If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing eyelet provided. To install the rear towing eyelet, see “Installing rear towing eyelet” on page 255. Before towing, release the parking brake and put the transmission in ”N”. The ignition switch must be in ”ACC” (engine off) or ”ON” (engine running). NOTICE Only use specified towing eyelet; otherwise your vehicle may be damaged. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes. 254 CAUTION If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (e) Installing rear towing eyelet 40sa50a 40sa48c 3. Tighten the rear towing eyelet securely by a wheel nut wrench. 1. Remove the rear towing eyelet cover on the rear bumper using a flat–bladed screwdriver. To protect the bodywork, place a piece of rag over the cover. CAUTION When installing the eyelet on the vehicle, be sure to tighten the rear eyelet securely. If the eyelet is loose, it may come off when being towed and result in death or serious injury. 40sa49a 2. Use the rear towing eyelet in the trunk. Secure it to the hole on the bumper by turning clockwise. (For the eyelet location, see page 243.) 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 255 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF THE RETRACTABLE HARDTOP DOES NOT CLOSE If the retractable hardtop does not close, check to see that the trunk lid and trunk lid opener main switch are set properly in accordance with the conditions for retractable hardtop activation shown on page 81. Although these requirements are met, if the retractable hardtop does not close, close it manually following the procedure below. Some procedures require 2 skilled people having strength. If they are not confident in strength and if there is no other person, besides you, to perform the work, have your Lexus inspected at Lexus dealer as soon as possible. In other procedures, you may be injured by performing them with bare hands. In that case, wear gloves or use a piece of rag for protection. CAUTION  Stop your vehicle in a safe and level place.  Apply the parking brake and put the selector lever in the “P” position.  Do not perform the work if anyone is in the vehicle.  Do not perform the work where the wind is blowing harder.  Leave the ignition switch off with the retractable hardtop partially closed. 256 NOTICE The radio antenna should be lowered to avoid damage during this procedure. INFORMATION Some procedures require 2 people. They should stand on each side of the rear of the vehicle and work in unison. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY Closing the retractable hardtop manually 40sa02 40sa01 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 257 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (a) Unlocking the trunk lid Push the trunk lid opener switch to unlock the trunk lid. If the trunk lid opener does not operate properly, unlock the trunk lid in accordance with the following procedure. 40sa04 40sa03
Loop of wire 2. Pull the loop of wire to unlock the trunk lid.
1 Mat 2 Cover 1. Lift up the mat in the lower box contained in the rear console box and remove the cover. 258 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (b) Opening the trunk lid (c) Setting up luggage links INFORMATION 40sa05a 2 people are required for this work. They should stand on each side of the rear of the vehicle and work in unison. 40sa06b Open the trunk lid fully.
Loop of wire 1. Pull out the green loops of wire from openings of the cover on both sides of the trunk to release the hinges. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 259 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE Do not apply the force to the part other than green painting part to avoid the deformation of the panel. 40sa07b
1 Loop of wire 2 Front of luggage link 40sa08a 2. While pulling out the loop of wire with one hand, put your other hand over the front side of the luggage link (where green painting is applied) and raise it gradually. The luggage links on both sides should be raised in unison. CAUTION CAUTION  Take care not to pinch your hand in the luggage link.  The luggage links should not be stopped raising until they are securely set up. If the trunk lid is lowered gradually, personal injury or damage to the vehicle could result. 260 Take care when lifting the trunk lid as the rear of the trunk lid comes around your head. INFORMATION Strength is required to set up the luggage links. Wear gloves or apply a piece of rag where your hands are put and exert the pressure gradually. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (d) Raising the package tray 40sq03 40sa10
1 Cable
1 Main board 2 Slide board 2 Joint 2. Disconnect the joints of the cables at both ends under the package tray using your hand. 3 Side board 1. Put your hands under the slide board as shown and raise the package tray gradually at 30 to 45. The joints are wrapped with tape. Move the joints up and down to disconnect them with tape. Disconnected joints should be kept away so as not to interfere the succeeding work. NOTICE Do not apply force directly to the side board as it moves in accordance with the main board movement. CAUTION Take care not to injure your hands when disconnecting the joints. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 261 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 40sa10b
1 Main board 2 Slide board 40sa11b 3 Side board 3. Raise the package tray gradually until it stops. NOTICE Do not apply force directly to the side board as it moves in accordance with the main board movement. 262 4. After raising it, push down the slide board as low as the main board. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (e) Closing the roof panel partially NOTICE The use of shorter side of Allen wrench may damage the roof panel. 40sa12c 40sa53 1. Take out the Allen wrench located in the trunk.
1 Roof stopper 2 Hook 3. After removing the 2 bolts, slide the roof stoppers on each side and take them off from the hooks. 40sa51 2. Remove the 2 bolts on each side using the longer side of the Allen wrench. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 263 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 40sa52 4. Insert your hands at the lower part of the roof and lift the roof upward gradually. At this time, the person on the side of the vehicle should lift the front of the roof a little and then 2 people should lift it gradually. 40sa14b 5. After the roof is lifted up to a certain point, 2 people lift it on the rear side of the vehicle in unison. CAUTION Do not stop lifting until the rear window is perpendicular to the ground. If the roof is lowered gradually, personal injury or damage to the vehicle could result. INFORMATION 2 people should lift the roof. Strength is required. Exert the pressure gradually. 264 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (f) Folding down the package tray 40sa15 40sa16a 6. Stop lifting the roof panel when the rear window is perpendicular to the ground.
1 Main board 2 Slide board With the slide board as low as the main board, fold down the main board rearward. CAUTION Stop lifting in this position. Further closing of the roof will cause the interference with the package tray, resulting in the damage to the tray. NOTICE Fold it down putting your hands as shown. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 265 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (g) Closing the roof panel fully 40sa18 40sa17
1 Drive gear shaft
1 Service hole cover 2 Drive gear shaft 1. Remove the service hole cover from the roof head lining using a flat–bladed screwdriver or equivalent. 2 Hook 2. Insert the wrench tip into the drive gear shaft and turn the wrench about one turn counterclockwise as viewed from the bottom. Make sure the hook protrudes from the roof panel. NOTICE Do not turn the wrench further after it rotates one turn and stops. 266 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 40sa19b 40sa20b 3. Gradually close the roof panel, then the rear window. CAUTION Take care not to catch your hands when closing the roof panel.
1 Guide hole 2 Guide pin 4. Make sure the guide pins at the top of the roof panel are in the guide holes on the top of the windshield and push down in the vicinity of the line separating the roof panel and rear window. INFORMATION 2 people are required to close the roof panel. They should stand on each side of the rear of the vehicle and work in unison. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 267 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (h) Closing the front of trunk lid INFORMATION 40sa21a  2 people are required for this work. They should stand on each side of the rear of the vehicle and work in unison.  Strength is required to lower the luggage links. Wear gloves or apply a piece of rag where your hands are put and exert the pressure gradually. 5. Insert the wrench tip into the drive gear shaft in the roof head lining and turn it about one turn clockwise as viewed from the bottom. 6. From the inside, push in the vicinity of the line separating the roof panel and rear window to make sure the top is locked securely. 7. Install the service hole cover as installed previously. 40sa22f NOTICE Do not turn the wrench further after it rotates one turn and stops.
Rear of luggage link Put your hand over the rear side of the luggage link shown in the illustration and apply downward pressure gradually. After lowering it to its limit, push once to secure. 268 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (i) Closing the rear of trunk lid Closing the quarter windows If the retractable hardtop does not close, the quarter windows can be closed electrically using the following operation. 1. Turn the ignition switch on. 2. Turn the trunk lid opener main switch in the glove box from the operative position to the inoperative position (in the cancelled position). See page 86. 40sa23b 3. Push the “OPEN/CLOSE” switch on the “OPEN” side twice slowly within 10 seconds after step 2. 4. Hold down the same switch on the “CLOSE” side once within 10 seconds after step 3. The quarter windows will close. Close the trunk lid as you do usually. Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. INFORMATION Operate the switch slowly. Pushing it quickly may not close the quarter windows. NOTICE Drive your vehicle at low speeds. High speed driving could cause the trunk lid to open. CAUTION  Before closing the quarter windows, first make sure it is safe to do so. Always make sure nobody places his/her head, hands or other parts of the body on the windows. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the closing windows, it could result in serious injury. If any part of your body or something should be caught, release your hand from the switch immediately. The window operation will be stopped. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 269 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SELECTOR LEVER  Never leave small children alone in the vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. They could use the retractable hardtop switch and get trapped in the windows. Unattended children can be involved in serious accidents.  When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the switch. 40sa25a If you cannot shift the selector lever, use the shift lock override button as follows: 1 270 Turn the ignition switch to ”LOCK” or ”ACC”. Make sure the parking brake is applied. Pry up the cover with a flat–bladed screwdriver or equivalent. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY LEXUS LINK SYSTEM (U.S.A. ONLY) 40sa26 40sa55a 2 Insert your finger, the screwdriver or equivalent into the hole to push down the shift lock override button. You can shift the selector lever while pushing the button. For your safety, keep the brake pedal depressed. Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. The Lexus Link System is an in–vehicle communications service that provides you with enhanced safety, security and convenience. With an active subscription you can push the “SERVICES” button for operator assistance or in an emergency situation such as a vehicle accident (in which the airbag was activated), you will automatically be connected to the Lexus Link Call Center which will assist you and/or send help 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. The Lexus Link System can also record your voice or your conversation with the Lexus Link Call Center Advisor. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 271 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY The Lexus Link System is a subscription–based service. To obtain any of the Lexus Link services you must have enrolled with the Lexus Link Call Center and have an active subscription. It is important to be aware that an active subscription is required to receive safety and security services. To learn more about your subscription status or how to renew or extend your subscription, please push the “SERVICES” button and speak to the Lexus Link Advisor, or you may dial toll free 1–800–25 Lexus (Toll–Free) (1–800–255–3987) and select the option for Lexus Link. If you are not enrolled, you will hear the explanation about Lexus Link System. The actual message is shown on “Audible voice prompts” on page 279. If you push the “SERVICES” button again, the services enrollment call will be announced. To cancel the enrollment call, push the “SERVICES” button one more time. NOTICE This system is only operational in GPS (Global Positioning System) and analog cellular coverage areas. Services may not be available in an area where the GPS and analog cellular phone signals cannot be received. 272 40sa54 NOTICE Observe the following instructions, or reception by GPS antenna may be affected.  Do not place luggage (especially metallic type) on the package tray.  Do not apply window tint (especially a conductive or metallic tape) by yourself. Consult with your Lexus dealer if you need to add window tint. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY When the ignition is turned to the “ON” position, “The Lexus Link System is active” is announced to inform you that the system is on. If your Lexus Link subscription expires, you will hear “The Lexus Link System is not active. To activate your Lexus Link System, press the “SERVICES” button now”. To learn more about your subscription status or how to renew or extend your subscription, please push the “SERVICES” button to speak to a Lexus Link Advisor, or you may dial toll free 1–800–25 Lexus (Toll–Free) (1–800–255–3987) and select the option for Lexus Link. If problems are detected in the Lexus Link System, you will hear “A Lexus Link System error has been detected. Please contact your Lexus dealer.” If you hear this message, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. In some cases, even if your subscription has expired, you may hear “The Lexus Link System is active”. This is due to the time delay required to process the deactivation of your Lexus Link System. During this period, when you push the “SERVICES” button, your call will be forwarded to enrollment. Once the deactivation process has been completed, you will hear “The Lexus Link System is not active”. NOTICE The voice prompt messages are the primary means to let you know the status of your subscription. It is important to be aware that an active subscription is required to receive safety and security services. If these voice prompt messages are disabled and you desire to have them re–activated, contact your Lexus dealer. When you push the “– VOL +” button on the “–” side immediately followed by the “PLAY” button, you can hear an explanation about the Lexus Link System. However, this function is not available when you are recording or hearing a playback. See “Audible voice prompts” on page 279 for a written version of this recorder message. The basic subscriber service package is available free of charge for the first year. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 273 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE  Do not remove the Lexus Link fuse and wiring harness with the ignition on, or an emergency call will be placed to the Lexus Link Call Center.  In the following cases, the buttons of the Lexus Link System may not be used. If this happens, have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.  When the retractable hardtop is open and the buttons have been exposed to rain.  When any liquid such as a drink in the cup holder is spilled on the buttons. Automatic notifications If an airbag deploys, an emergency signal is sent automatically to the Lexus Link Call Center. In your vehicle, the system announces “Placing an emergency call to Lexus Link Center.” In response to the signal, the Lexus Link Advisor will attempt to communicate with you first. If the Advisor cannot get any response from you, the Advisor will locate your vehicle through the GPS, call the nearest emergency services provider, describe the situation and your location. If necessary, the Advisor will transfer your call to the emergency services operator. If the theft deterrent system on your vehicle is activated, the Lexus Link System on your vehicle will automatically call the Lexus Link Call Center. The Advisor will attempt to contact you to determine whether the alarm is valid. If you report to the Lexus Link Call Center that your vehicle has been stolen, the Advisor will locate, track and provide location information to the appropriate law enforcement authority. To protect subscriber privacy, the Lexus Link Call Center will not provide the location of a vehicle to anyone other than a law enforcement authority. If you accidentally activate the vehicle alarm, push the “UNLOCK” button on the wireless remote control key within 55 seconds after the alarm was set off, or insert the key into the door keyhole or ignition switch. The Lexus Link System will cancel the theft call. 274 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY Manual emergency calling NOTICE  Once the emergency button is pushed, an emergency call cannot be cancelled.  This system is only operational in GPS and analog cellular coverage areas. Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services (i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions, service call functions, door locking/unlocking function) are deactivated. 40sa56a You can place an emergency call manually. Open the cover and push the emergency button. You will hear “Placing an emergency call to Lexus Link Center.” Upon reception of your call, the Advisor will locate your vehicle and contact you to assess the situation. If necessary, the Advisor will alert the nearest emergency service provider. This emergency call should only be made in life–threatening situations. If your vehicle is stolen, call the Lexus Link Call Center at 1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free) (1–800–255–3987). The Center will locate, track and provide location information to the appropriate police authority. To protect subscriber privacy, the Lexus Link Call Center will not provide the location of a vehicle to anyone other than a law enforcement authority. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 275 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE This system is only operational in GPS and analog cellular coverage areas. Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services (i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions, service call functions, door locking/unlocking function) are deactivated. Other Services 40sa57a When you push the “SERVICES” button, you will hear “Calling the Lexus Link Center”. When the Advisor receives your location and ID from the system, the Advisor provides you with the service. The services provided will depend on the level of service package selected. For details about various services that are available, contact your Lexus dealer, or push the “SERVICES” button and speak to the Lexus Link Advisor, or you may dial toll free 1–800–25 Lexus (Toll–Free) (1–800–255–3987) and select the option for Lexus Link. To cancel a services call, push the “SERVICES” button a second time. “Lexus Link call cancelled” will be announced. 276 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY If any problem concerning the Lexus Link System occurs during driving, the system will announce “A Lexus Link System error has been detected. Please contact your Lexus dealer.” If you hear this message, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. Door Locking/Unlocking by Lexus Link System Lexus Link services may not be available if: If you find that your vehicle has not been locked, call the Lexus Link Call Center 1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free) (1–800–255–3987), the Lexus Link Advisor can assist in locking your vehicle.  The components or wire harnesses for the system are damaged;  The Lexus Link Call Center is not operational;  The antenna does not work properly due to vehicle damage;  In a weak or non–analog cellular coverage area;  In area where the GPS signal is weak or cannot be received;  The Lexus Link subscription has expired. NOTICE Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services (i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions, service call functions) are deactivated. The Lexus Link System will allow your vehicle to be locked and unlocked remotely. In case you are locked out, call the Lexus Link Call Center 1–800–25 Lexus (Toll–Free) (1–800–255–3987), a Lexus Link Advisor can assist in unlocking your vehicle. NOTICE You must provide the Lexus Link operator with your Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number ) or personal security word, before they lock/unlock your vehicle. However, the Lexus Link System will not be able to lock or unlock your vehicle if it has been parked for 48 hours or more after the ignition is turned off. Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services (i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions, service call functions, door locking/unlocking function) are deactivated. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 277 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY At the start of recording, “Recording” will be announced. At the end of recording, you will hear “Recording complete”. If there are only 15 seconds left for recording, two chimes sound. If the recording memory is full, “Recording time exceeded” will be announced and recording will be terminated. Memo record 40sa58a
1 “REC” button 2 ”PLAY” button 3 ”– VOL +” button During a service call, you can record a conversation with the Lexus Link Call Center Advisor. This function is very convenient for drivers so they do not have to take notes while driving. “REC” button: Push this button to record information or a conversation with Lexus Link Call Center. To stop recording, push the button again. Up to 5 minutes of recording time is available. When you push the “REC” button, all previous messages are deleted and the system begins recording your new message. 278 If you push this button while you are hearing a playback of recording, it terminates the playback and recording will start. At this time, the previous recording will be erased. “PLAY” button: Push this button to play the recorded conversation. “Playback Complete” is announced when the playback is complete. To stop the operation, push the button again. “Playback Cancelled” is announced. The volume has a total of seven positions/levels available. “– VOL +” button: Push this button on either side to adjust the volume. When you change the volume, one chime sounds. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY Audible voice prompts The following table shows the voice responses from the Lexus Link System. Voice phrase: Explanation about Lexus Link System This is the Lexus Link system. Integrating global positioning satellite and wireless communication technology into your Lexus and providing enhanced safety, security, and convenience. At the touch of a button, or automatically in the event of an accident, you are connected to a Lexus Link Advisor who will assist you – 24 hours a day, 7 days a week where GPS and cellular coverage is available. The Lexus Link System also has an audio recorder allowing you to record reminders to yourself or information from a Lexus Link Advisor. To contact a Lexus Link Advisor, press the “SERVICES” button. The Lexus Link System will inform the advisor of your vehicle’s current location and your identity. The advisors can handle a wide variety of services, such as giving directions to shops, gas stations, ATMs, restaurants and roadside assistance with location. Services available will depend on the service package you selected. In an emergency, press the emergency services button on your Lexus Link console. It is marked with a red ambulance. Upon receiving your call, the advisor will assess the situation and, if necessary, alert the nearest emergency services provider. The emergency button should only be used in life threatening situations. If your Lexus detects that an airbag deployment may have occurred, the Lexus Link System will automatically send an emergency message to the Lexus Link Call Center. The system will also automatically contact the call center if the security system alarm goes off. An advisor will first contact you to determine if the alarm is valid. Upon your confirmation, the advisor will then provide the vehicle location to the police. If you accidentally set off the alarm, press the remote door unlock, or insert your key in the door lock or ignition within 55 seconds. This will prevent the Lexus Link System from placing a theft call. The volume control lets you adjust the volume level for Lexus Link calls, system prompts, and memos. Press the plus key to increase volume and the minus key to decrease it. To record a memo or a call, press the key labeled “REC”. When you are finished recording, press the “REC” button again. To listen to the memo, press the “PLAY” button. You can record one message up to five minutes long. When you record a new memo, all of the previous memos will be erased. For more detailed information on the use, features and limitations of this system, please consult your Lexus Link Owner’s Manual. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 279 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY Voice phrase 280 Description The Lexus Link System is active. The system is operational with the ignition on. Placing an emergency call to Lexus Link Center Emergency call is placed. Calling the Lexus Link Center Service call is placed. Lexus Link Call cancelled Service call is cancelled. Previous attempt to call the Lexus Link Center was unsuccessful. The attempt to call the Lexus Link Center was unsuccessful. Recording The recording will start. Recording complete The recording is complete. Recording time exceeded The recording memory is now full. Playback complete The playback is complete. Playback cancelled The playback is cancelled. A Lexus Link System error has been detected. Please contact your Lexus dealer. An error has been detected with the Lexus Link System. Contact your Lexus dealer. Voice phrase Description The Lexus Link System is not active. To activate your Lexus Link System, press the “SERVICES” button now. Message notifies vehicle occupants that the subscription has expired. Your Lexus Link subscription has expired. Services are not available. You operated a Lexus Link button despite an expired subscription. Your Lexus Link subscription has expired, push the “Services” button a second time to reactivate. No cellular service available. Unable to contact the Call Center. In cellular coverage areas without analog coverage, you cannot use the Lexus Link System. Unable to contact the Lexus Link Call Center until you have cellular coverage. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR LOCK YOURSELF OUT Lexus Link transceiver antenna You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you can give them the key number and master key. Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to make a new key. If you lose all your master keys, you cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobiliser system must be replaced. 40sa59a See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 8. You can use the wireless remote control system with the new key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information. The Lexus Link transceiver antenna is removable. Before taking the vehicle to an automatic car wash, disconnect the antenna by unscrewing it from the body mount. NOTICE If you forget reattaching the Lexus Link transceiver antenna, the Lexus Link System may not function properly. If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you using special tools. If your vehicle is equipped with Lexus Link System, call the Lexus Link Call Center 1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free) (1–800–255–3987). Once you provide the Lexus Link Call Center Advisor with your Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number), or personal security word, they will unlock your vehicle. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 281 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE You must provide the Lexus Link operator with your Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number ) or personal security word, before they lock/unlock your vehicle. However, the Lexus Link System will not be able to lock or unlock your vehicle if it has been parked for 48 hours or more after the ignition is turned off. Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services (i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions, service call functions) are deactivated. If you must break a window to get in, we suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid glass cuts. 282 SECTION 5 MAINTENANCE Maintenance Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . 284 285 288 289 For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 283 MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your Lexus vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance as well as day–to–day care is more important than ever before to ensure smooth, trouble–free, safe, and economical driving. The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance” are those required to be serviced at regular intervals. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance services, is performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information. It is recommended that only genuine Lexus parts be used for maintenance. General maintenance You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and system performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information. General maintenance items are those day–to–day care practices that are important to your vehicle for proper operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the general maintenance items are performed regularly. These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or your Lexus dealer. 284 Scheduled maintenance For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. The owner may elect to use non–Lexus supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission control system warranty. However, use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems. MAINTENANCE GENERAL MAINTENANCE Where to go for service? Lexus technicians are well–trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in–dealership training programs. They are well informed about the operation of all the systems on your vehicle. Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice. You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements of your vehicle. CAUTION Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again, be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service performed on your Lexus. Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine. Vehicle exterior Items listed below should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Tire pressure What about do–it–yourself maintenance? Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented in Section 6. If you are a skilled do–it–yourself mechanic, the Lexus service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do–it–yourself maintenance can affect your warranty coverage. See “Owner ’s Guide”, “Owner ’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details. Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a month and adjust as shown on the tire pressure label. See page 321 for additional information. Tire surface Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive wear. See page 323 for additional information. Wheel nuts When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts for looseness. Tighten them if necessary. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 285 MAINTENANCE Tire rotation Steering wheel Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.) See page 323 for additional information. Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive free play or strange noise. Fluid leaks Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately. Doors and engine hood Check that all doors, including trunk lid, operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood when the primary latch is released. Vehicle interior Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Lights Make sure the headlight, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim. Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers Check that all service reminder indicators and warning buzzers function properly. 286 Seats Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position. Seat belts Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged. Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching. Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper clearance and free play. Check the brake booster function. Brakes At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied. Parking brake Check that the lever has the proper travel and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied. MAINTENANCE Automatic transmission ”Park” mechanism Power steering fluid level On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in ”P” position and all brakes released. Check the level on the dipstick. The level should be in the ”HOT” or ”COLD” range depending on the fluid temperature. See page 320 for additional information. Engine compartment Exhaust system Items listed below should be checked from time to time, e.g. each time when refueling. Washer fluid If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust caution” on page 195.) Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 343 for additional information. Engine coolant level Make sure the coolant level is between the Upper and Lower lines on the see–through reservoir when the engine is cold. See page 311 for additional information. Battery Your Lexus has a maintenance free battery. You do not have to add distilled water. For longer life of the battery, however, see page 336 for additional information. Brake fluid level Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 319 for additional information. Engine oil level Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 308 for additional information. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 287 MAINTENANCE DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED REPAIRING? Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip–offs that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:
Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
Flat–looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road
Strange noises related to suspension movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal, pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when braking 288
Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or repair. CAUTION Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly personal injury. MAINTENANCE EMISSION INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE (I/M) PROGRAMS Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On–Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. When the OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not been set in the OBD system. Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving. However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the codes may not be completely set. Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken. If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test and the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re–testing. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 289 MAINTENANCE 290 SECTION 6–1 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Introduction Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do–it–yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 292 293 294 295 296 291 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION 61sa02 61sa01 The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the Certification Label. The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top of the instrument panel and can be seen through the windshield from outside. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. 61sa03a The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown. 292 INTRODUCTION ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW 61st02 1 Battery 2 Fuse box 3 Engine oil filler cap 4 Engine oil level dipstick 5 Brake fluid reservoir 6 Washer fluid tank 7 Radiator 8 Condenser 9 Engine coolant reservoir 10 Electric cooling fans 11 Power steering fluid reservoir 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 293 INTRODUCTION DO–IT–YOURSELF SERVICE PRECAUTIONS If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in this Section.  Right after driving, the engine compartment – the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold and power steering fluid reservoir, etc. – will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating problems.  Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames near fuel or the battery. Their fumes are flammable. Performing do–it–yourself maintenance during the warranty period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions.  Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports. This Section gives instructions only for those items that are relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be performed by a qualified technician with special tools.  Be sure the ignition is off if you work near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille. With the ignition on, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or if the coolant temperature is high. For information on tools and parts for do–it–yourself maintenance, see ”Parts and tools” on page 296. Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you should be especially careful to observe: CAUTION  When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. (Removing rings, watches, and ties is advisable.) 294  Use eye protection whenever you work on or under your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.  Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.  Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. INTRODUCTION POSITIONING THE JACK NOTICE  Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally causing a short circuit.  Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc. 61sa07  Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring could cause a fire in the engine compartment.  Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the transmission could be damaged.  Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the wiper frame.
Front 61sa08a
Rear When jacking up your vehicle with the jack, position the jack correctly as shown in the illustrations. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 295 INTRODUCTION CAUTION PARTS AND TOOLS When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury: Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform do–it–yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.  Follow jacking instructions.  Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Personal injury may occur. Checking the engine oil level  Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.  “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil. For recommended oil viscosity, see page 310.  Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in “P”.  Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.  Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone; use vehicle support stands.  Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle  When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack. Parts (if level is low): Tools:  Rag or paper towel  Funnel (only for adding oil) Checking the engine coolant level Parts (if level is low):  “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent See ”Checking the engine coolant level” on page 311 for instructions.  Demineralized or distilled water NOTICE Make sure to place the jack correctly, or your vehicle may be damaged. 296 Tools:  Funnel (only for adding coolant) INTRODUCTION Checking brake fluid Checking the cartridge type fuses Parts (if level is low): Parts (if replacement is necessary):  FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid  Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage rating as original Tools:  Funnel (only for adding fluid) Adding washer fluid Checking power steering fluid Parts:  Water Parts (if level is low):  Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)  Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III Tools: Tools:  Funnel  Rag or paper towel  Funnel (only for adding fluid) Checking battery condition Tools:  Warm water  Baking soda  Grease  Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) Checking and replacing the blade type fuses Parts (if replacement is necessary):  Fuse with same amperage rating as original 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 297 INTRODUCTION 298 SECTION 6–2 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 300 303 305 306 307 308 311 313 314 299 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS – GENERAL Model 3UZ–FE Type 8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 91.0 X 82.5 mm (3.58 X 3.25 in.) Displacement 4293 cm3 (262.0 cu.in.) Valve clearance (engine cold) Intake Exhaust 0.15 – 0.25 mm (0.006 – 0.010 in.) 0.25 – 0.35 mm (0.010 – 0.014 in.) Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment – FUEL 300 Fuel type Only UNLEADED Octane rating 91 (Research octane number 96) or higher ENGINE – LUBRICATION SYSTEM Oil capacity Drain and refill with filter without filter 5.2 L (5.5 qt., 4.5 lmp.qt.) 4.6 L (4.9 qt., 4.0 lmp.qt.) Oil grade API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil Recommended oil viscosity 5W–30 62sa08 Temperature range anticipated before next oil change NOTE: “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 301 ENGINE – COOLING SYSTEM Capacity 9.9 L (10.5 qt., 8.7 lmp.qt.) Coolant type “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent With ethylene–glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone. NOTE: “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. In order to avoid technical problems, we strongly recommend using “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. – IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plug – Make DENSO NGK – Gap SK20R11 IFR6A11 1.1 mm (0.043 in.) – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Battery – Open voltage at 20C (68F): – Charging rates 302 12.8 V Fully charged 12.4 V Half charged 12.0 V Discharged [Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights turned off] 5A max. ENGINE FUEL Octane rating Fuel type Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline. To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will not. At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5–M93 in Canada. NOTICE Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will cause the three–way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly. Also, this can increase maintenance costs. Select premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher for optimum engine performance. However, if such premium type cannot be obtained, you may temporarily use unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded fuel with an octane number or rating lower than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If severe, this will lead to engine damage. If your engine knocks ... If you detect heavy knocking even when using the recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus dealer. However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal and there is no need for concern. Gasoline containing detergent additives Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build–up of engine deposits. However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 303 ENGINE Quality gasoline Gasoline containing MMT Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for quality fuel named World–Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied world wide. The WWFC consists of three categories that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle performance. Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Cleaner burning gasoline Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is available in many areas. Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality. Oxygenates in gasoline Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87. Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol. 304 Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service. Gasoline quality In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then consult your Lexus dealer. NOTICE  Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.  If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue its use. ENGINE  Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause paint damage. Fuel tank capacity 75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.) FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SYSTEM The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the ignition switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start it. CAUTION Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, it is the fuel system that has been damaged and it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the engine. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 305 ENGINE FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION Functions of engine oil Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order. Engine oil consumption It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows.  Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process.  Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve stems. The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven. 306 More oil is consumed by high–speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls have not become conditioned. Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp·qt./600 miles). When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately. For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not changed. The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds. ENGINE USED ENGINE OIL Importance of engine oil level check One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle. NOTICE Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil. CAUTION  Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.  Do not leave used oil within the reach of children. For detailed information on oil level check, see ”Checking the engine oil level” on page 308.  Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service station for information concerning recycling or disposal. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 307 ENGINE CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL 61sa05 61sa04a 1 Add oil 3 Too full With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. 4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a rag under the end. If it is between the full line ( 5 ) and the low line ( 4 ), it is O.K. 1. To get a true reading, the vehicle should be on a level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. NOTICE 2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it clean. Be careful not to drop the engine oil on the vehicle components. 3. Standing up on the left side of the vehicle, reinsert the dipstick in the direction so that the ”ENGINE OIL” on top should be read correctly and push it in as far as it will go, or the reading will not be correct. 308 2 O.K. ENGINE NOTICE  Be careful not to spill the engine oil on the vehicle components. 61sa06a  Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.  Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after adding the oil. If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low line, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time, checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to fill between the low line and the full line on the dipstick is indicated below for reference. When the level reaches within the correct range, return the filler cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click. Oil quantity. L (qt., lmp. qt.) 1.5 (1.6, 1.3) 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 309 ENGINE Engine oil selection Oil identification marks “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity. Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil. Recommended viscosity: 5W–30 62sa08 Temperature range anticipated before next oil change SAE 5W–30 is the best choice for your vehicle, for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather. If SAE 5W–30 is not available, SAE 10W–30 may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W–30 at the next oil change. 310 62L038
API Service Symbol
ILSAC Certification Mark Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.  The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside of the container. The top portion of the label shows the oil quality by API (American Petroleum Institute) designation such as SL. The center portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity grade such as SAE 5W–30. ”Energy–Conserving”, shown in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuel–saving capabilities.  The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the front of the container. ENGINE To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is available, which has been specifically tested and approved for all Lexus engines. CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”. 62sa04a
1 Reservoir cap 2 Upper line 3 Lower line Look at the see–through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the”FULL” and ”LOW” lines on the reservoir. If the level is low, add ethylene–glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine temperature. However, if the level is on or below the ”LOW” line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the ”FULL” line. Always use ethylene–glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. See information in the next column. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 311 ENGINE If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing, there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock and water pump. If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system. CAUTION To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Coolant type selection Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling system. Your coolant must contain ethylene–glycol type coolant for proper corrosion protection of your engine that contains aluminum components. We have used “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” in your Lexus vehicle. In order to avoid technical problems, we strongly recommend using “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent. In addition to preventing freezing and subsequent damage to the engine, this type of coolant will also prevent corrosion. Further supplemental inhibitors or additives are neither needed nor recommended. Read the coolant container for information on freeze protection. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with plain water (preferably demineralized water or distilled water). The total capacity of the cooling system is given on pages 302. We recommend a 50% solution for your Lexus, to provide protection down to about –35C (–31F). When it is extremely cold, to provide protection down to about –50C (–58F), a 60% solution is recommended. Do not use more than 70% solution for better coolant performance. NOTICE Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone. 312 ENGINE The engine cooling system is integral to maximizing performance of your Lexus vehicle. In line with this, it is strongly recommended that you use “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” for protecting the system, as it is an ethylene–glycol based premium antifreeze coolant with excellent corrosion protection properties that has been specifically formulated for use in Lexus vehicles. If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant”. CAUTION CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND CONDENSER To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot. NOTICE To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do not perform the work by yourself. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 313 ENGINE SPARK PLUGS 62r031c Your engine is fitted with iridium–tipped spark plugs. NOTICE Use only iridium–tipped spark plugs and do not adjust gaps for your engine performance and smooth drivability. 314 SECTION 6–3 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Chassis Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 316 319 320 321 323 323 327 328 330 330 315 CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS – DIFFERENTIAL Oil capacity Oil type and viscosity 1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 lmp.qt.) Vehicles without synthetic oil information label Hypoid gear oil API GL–5 Above –18C (0F): SAE 90 Below –18C (0F): SAE 80W or SAE 80W–90 Vehicles with synthetic oil information label* Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL–5 SAE 75W–90 or its equivalent NOTICE NOTE: *Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only: The following label is affixed on the right side of the differential carrier. Use the type and viscosity shown on the label when the differential oil is replaced. Synthetic oil information label 316 Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only: Use of differential oil other than “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL–5 SAE 75W–90” or its equivalent may damage the differential gear of your vehicle and diminish fuel efficiency. For the reasons mentioned above, Lexus recommends use of “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL–5 SAE 75W–90”. Another differential oil of matching quality can also be used, (but note that despite the similarity in nomenclature between “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL–5 SAE 75W–90” and oils that meet SAE 75W–90 specifications, compliance with the SAE specification does not guarantee that an oil has all characteristic required to avoid the problem described above.) If you are unable to locate an equivalent to “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL–5 SAE 75W–90”, contact your Lexus dealer for further details or another duly qualified and equipped professional. CHASSIS – AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid capacity Drain and refill 1.8 L (1.9 qt., 1.6 lmp.qt.) Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV* *Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary. Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV” (ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring optimum transmission performance. NOTICE Using automatic transmission fluid other than Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle. – BRAKES Pedal clearance *1 100 mm (3.9 in.) Min. Pedal free play 0.2 – 20 mm (0.008 – 0.08 in.) Brake pad wear limit 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) Parking brake lining wear limit Parking brake adjustment Fluid type *2 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) 7 – 9 clicks SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 *1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the pressure of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf.) with the engine running *2: Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the pressure of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf.) – STEERING Free play Power steering fluid Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.) Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 317 CHASSIS – TIRES AND WHEELS Standard and run–flat tires: Tire size 245/40ZR18 245/40ZR18 93Y Tire inflation pressure Recommended cold tire inflation pressure Front Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi) 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi) For sustained high speeds above 180 km/h (112 mph), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 80 kPa (0.8 kgf/cm2 or bar, 12 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire pressure molded on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 18 x 8 JJ Wheel nut torque 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.) Compact spare tire: Tire size T145/70R17 106M Tire inflation pressure 420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi) Wheel size 17 x 4T Wheel nut torque 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.) NOTE: For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 321 through 330. 318 CHASSIS If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow. CHECKING BRAKE FLUID Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. 63sa06 CAUTION Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable with your eyes, go to the doctor. To check the fluid level, simply look at the see–through reservoir. The level should be between the ”MAX” and ”MIN” lines on the tank. It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. NOTICE If you spill some of the fluid, be sure to wipe it off to prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious mechanical problem. If the level is low, add FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid to the brake reservoir. Refilling brake fluid: 1. Turn the ignition switch off. 2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times. 3. Remove the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the ”MAX” line. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 319 CHASSIS CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID 63sa05 63sa04
1 If hot O.K. 2 If hot add 4 If cold add Check the fluid level on the dipstick. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III. If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot (60C – 80C or 140F – 175F). You may also check the level when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10C – 30C or 50F – 85F) if the engine has not been run for about five hours. 320 3 If cold O.K. Clean all dirt off the reservoir and look at the fluid level. If the fluid is cold, the level should be in the ”COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the ”HOT” range. If the level is at the low side of the appropriate range, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III to bring the level within the range. To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage. CHASSIS CHECKING TIRE PRESSURE CAUTION The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn yourself. NOTICE  Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged. 63sa03a  When adding the power steering fluid, avoid spilling it. The generator under the power steering reservoir could be damaged if fluid is spilled on it. The recommended cold tire pressure, tire size and the vehicle capacity weight are given on the label. You should check the tire pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. And don’t forget the spare, if so equipped. The pressure for the spare tire should be 420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi). Incorrect tire pressure may waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive. If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 321 CHASSIS CAUTION The following instructions for checking tire pressure should be observed: Keep your tire pressure properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.  The pressure should be checked only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an accurate cold tire pressure reading. Low tire pressure (underinflation):  Excessive wear  Uneven wear  Poor handling  Possibility of blowouts from overheated tire.  Poor sealing of the tire bead  Wheel deformation and/or tire separation High tire pressure (overinflation):  Poor handling  Excessive wear at the center of the tire tread  A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards  If you cannot adjust the tire pressure when the tires are cold, add 10 to 20 kPa more to the front tires and rear tires than the cold tire pressure, but never exceed the maximum cold tire pressure molded on the tire sidewall.  Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. Besides, tire pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade handling and ride.  Do not bleed or reduce tire pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire pressure to be higher after driving.  Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. The passengers and luggage weight should be located so that the vehicle is balanced.  Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have been lost, have new ones put on as soon as possible. CAUTION The pressure for the compact spare tire must be 420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi). 322 CHASSIS Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the same direction when using them again. Tires should be stored in a cool dry place. ROTATING TIRES CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES 63sa07a When to replace your tires To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus recommends that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.) However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and road surface conditions. The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated above. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out–of–balance wheels, or severe braking. 63sa02a
1 New tread 2 Tread wear indicator 3 Worn tread Replace the tires when the tread wear indicators show. The location of the tread wear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or “∆” marks molded on the sidewall of each tire. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 323 CHASSIS The tires on your Lexus have built–in tread wear indicators to help you know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced. Your vehicle is equipped with 245/40ZR18 or 245/40ZR18 93Y tires: Your Lexus has been fitted with specially developed tires which provide exceptional dynamic performance under general road conditions. However your riding comfort may worsen a little and road noise may increase during driving. Riding comfort and road noise with the run–flat tires may be a little worse than that with the standard tires. You may also notice that your tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on the snowy and/or icy roads when compared to high aspect ratio tires, etc. Be sure to have snow tires or tire chains on the snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully with the speed appropriate for road conditions. NOTICE Low profile tire like 245/40ZR18 or 245/40ZR18 93Y may have greater damage than usual tires to its tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following.  Be sure to use with proper tire pressure. If the tire pressure is low, the tire may have greater damage. For detailed information about tire pressure, see page 318 or 321.  Avoid driving onto high, sharp–edged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage. The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.). If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire should be replaced. If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer. If an air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond repair. 324 CHASSIS Any tires which are over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious. Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or seldom been used. This also applies to the spare tire and tires stored for future use. Uniform tire quality grading This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. NOTICE  When you purchase new tires, consult your Lexus dealer. If you change from run–flat tires to standard tires, a spare tire should also be purchased.  When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have them repaired or replaced by Lexus dealer or authorized dealer. The tire pressure sensors will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.  When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for air pressure sensors as well. DOT quality grades – All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Tread wear – The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 – 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 325 CHASSIS Traction AA, A, B, C – The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Temperature A, B, C – The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 326 Tire selection When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and construction, and the same or greater load capacity as the originally installed tires. Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow chains. CAUTION Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.  Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias–ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.  Do not mix run–flat tires or standard tires on your vehicle.  Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control. If you need to change from conventional tires to radial tires or vice versa, replace them as a set. CHASSIS INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS When to use snow tires or chains Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on snow or ice. On wet or dry road, conventional or radial tires provide better traction than snow or studded tires. Snow tire selection If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. CAUTION Snow tire installation Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. Installing snow tires on the rear wheels only can lead to an excessive difference in road grip capability between the front and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control. CAUTION  Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.  Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of snow tires. Tire chain selection Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location or type of road. Always check the local regulations before installing chains. Use SAE Class ”S” type radial tire chains, with the exception of radial cable chains or V–bar type chains. Chain installation Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.  Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control. Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible. Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains after driving 0.5 – 1.0 km (1/4 – 1/2 mile). When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain manufacturer. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 327 CHASSIS NOTICE  When the snow tires must be repaired or replaced, have them repaired or replaced by Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure sensor will be affected by the installation or removal of snow tires.  When the snow tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for air pressure sensors as well.  Do not attempt to use a tire chain on the compact spare tire, as it may result in damage to the vehicle as well as the tire.  When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident may occur. REPLACING WHEELS As you might have difficulty in identifying a flat or deflated tire, a tire pressure warning system is provided on this vehicle. When replacing the wheels, be sure to install air pressure sensors on the wheels. There are 2 ways to set up the air pressure sensors. INFORMATION If the chains are installed, the air pressure warning system may not operate properly. CAUTION  Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.  Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.  Avoid sharp turns or locked–wheel braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling. 328 a. Remove the sensor from the old wheel and install it to the new wheel. b. Use a new wheel and sensor. You have to register an ID code for a new sensor. Up to 2 sets of codes can be registered. As one ID for the originally installed sensor is registered at “MAIN” of the selector switch, use the “2nd” position to register an ID for the new sensor. You do not need to re–register the ID code for any other replacements. For the use of the originally installed tires, put the selector switch at “MAIN” and for the use of tires purchased later, put the switch at “2nd”. For the sensor selector switch, see page 224. CHASSIS Wheel selection CAUTION  Have the tires, wheels or sensors replaced and ID codes registered by Lexus dealer. If you need sensors, purchase from Lexus dealer.  The use of non–genuine wheels will cause the air pressure sensor to transmit the electronic code in different manner, resulting in the failure of the system. When to replace your wheels If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced. If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the wheel or cause loss of handling control. When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset. Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer. A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to the body and chassis. Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have been straightened may have hidden structural damage and therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. CAUTION Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.  Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 329 CHASSIS ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS  When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km (1000 miles). CAUTION  If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles). Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.  When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels.  Use only the Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for your aluminum wheels.  When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.  As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately. 330 SECTION 6–4 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Electrical components Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing the blade type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the cartridge type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the headlight aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 332 336 338 339 341 343 343 346 331 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS SPECIFICATIONS – FUSES –LOCATION OF FUSES 64sa06a 64sa02a
Driver’s side kick panel 64sa07a
1 2 3 4 332
Passenger’s side kick panel Engine compartment Passenger’s side kick panel Driver’s side kick panel Trunk ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 64sa08
Trunk
Engine compartment 64sa09b 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 333 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. FUSE AMPERE 1 TI & TE 15 Tilt and telescopic steering 5 Air conditioning system, Audio system, Glove box light, Trip–information display, Cigarette lighter, Electronic throttle control system 2 334 PANEL CIRCUIT 3 FR FOG 15 Fog lights, Headlight switch 4 D P/SEAT 30 Power seat system 5 D–IG 10 Gauges and meters, Headlight cleaner, Charging system, Seat belt pretensioner system 6 MPX–IG 7.5 Tilt and telescopic steering, Power door lock system, SRS, Power seat system No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 16 IG2 7.5 SRS 17 MPX–B1 7.5 Power door lock, Steering lock, Engine immobiliser, Power seat system, Retractable hardtop 18 MPX–B3 7.5 Tilt and telescopic steering, Headlight switch, Windshield wiper and washer switch, Turn signal switch 19 DOME 7.5 Interior light, Personal lights, Vanity lights, Foot lights, Ignition switch light, Trunk light, Antenna, Garage door opener system, Audio system 20 MPX–B2 7.5 Gauges and meters, Vehicle stability control system, Tire pressure warning system 21 H–LP LVL 5 Headlight leveling system 22 P–IG 10 Shift lock system, Seat heater, Trip–information display, Antenna, Inside rear view mirror, Theft deterrent system 23 SEAT HTR 20 Seat heater RADIO NO.2 10 Audio system, Trip–information display, Seat belt warning light, Shift lock system 7 WIPER 30 8 PWR OUTLET Windshield wiper 15 9 OBD 7.5 10 AM1 5 11 ABS–IG 7.5 Vehicle stability control system 12 SECURITY 7.5 Theft deterrent system 24 13 TAIL 7.5 Tail lights, Side marker lights, Parking lights, Headlight switch 25 CIG 15 Cigarette lighter 14 STOP 5 Stop lights 26 WASHER 20 Windshield washer 15 HEATER 10 Air conditioning system 27 A/C 5 Air conditioning system Power outlet On–board diagnosis system Power source ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 28 P P/SEAT 30 Power seat system 29 TV 5 TV, Navigation system 30 DEFOG 30 Rear window defogger 31 LCE LP 7.5 License plate lights 32 ROOF RH 20 Retractable hardtop lock system 33 FUEL OPN 10 Fuel filler door opener 34 ROOF LH 20 Retractable hardtop lock system 35 P–TRAY 20 Quarter window 36 LGG LH 20 Luggage lock system 37 LGG RH 20 Luggage lock system No. 38 IG2 20 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 39 MAIN 50 Headlights (low beam) 20 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 40 41 IG2 MAIN P–DOOR 25 Power windows, Power door lock system, Power rear view mirror control system, Outside rear view mirror defogger, Door courtesy lights FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 42 D–DOOR 25 Power windows, Power door lock system, Power rear view mirror control system, Outside rear view mirror defogger, Door courtesy lights 43 D/C CUT 15 All components in “DOME”, “MPX–B1”, “MPX–B2” and “MPX–B3” fuses 44 TURN–HAZ 15 Turn signal lights, Emergency flashers 45 ETCS 15 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 46 HORN 10 Horn, Headlight switch 47 RADIO NO.1 30 48 TEL 5 Telephone 49 ALT–S 5 Charging system 50 EFI 25 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 51 AM2 30 All components in “ST” and “IG2” fuses and starting system 52 ABS NO.2 40 Anti–lock brake system 53 ALT 140 Charging system 54 ABS NO.1 60 Anti–lock brake system 55 HEATER 50 Air conditioning system Audio system 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 335 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. AMPERE CIRCUIT CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION 56 RR J/B 50 All components in “DEFOG”, “ROOF RH”, “ROOF LH”, “LGG RH”, “LGG LH”, “P–TRAY”, “LCE LP”, and “FUEL OPN” fuses 57 H–LP CLN 30 Headlight cleaner 58 FAN 40 Air conditioning system 59 FAN NO.2 40 Air conditioning system The battery produces flammable and explosive hydrogen gas. 60 H–LP R LWR 15 Right–hand headlight (low beam)  Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery terminals with tools. 61 H–LP L LWR 15 Left–hand headlight (low beam)  Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. 62 H–LP UPR 20 Headlight (high beam), Headlight switch 63 STARTER 7.5 Starting system 10 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, Emission control system 64 336 FUSE EFI NO.2 65 IGN 5 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, Anti–lock brake system, Traction control system, Vehicle stability control system, Cruise control system 66 INJ 10 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system Precautions CAUTION BATTERY PRECAUTIONS The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.  Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.  Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.  Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.  Keep children away from the battery. EMERGENCY MEASURES  If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the medical office. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS  If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contact area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical attention immediately. Checking battery exterior  If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow the procedure above, if necessary. 64sa17a  If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.  Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
1 Terminals 2 Hold–down clamp Check the battery for corroded or loose connections, cracks, or loose hold–down clamps. 1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion. 2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts –but do not overtighten. 3. Tighten the hold–down clamp only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery case. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 337 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS NOTICE  Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned off before performing maintenance.  When checking the battery, remove the ground cable first and reinstall it last.  Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.  Take care no solution gets into the battery when washing it. BATTERY RECHARGING PRECAUTIONS During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas. Therefore, before recharging: 1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. 2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the charger cables to the battery and when disconnecting them. CAUTION  Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.  Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode causing personal injuries. NOTICE Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, make sure all accessories are turned off. 338 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS CHECKING AND REPLACING THE BLADE TYPE FUSES 64sa13 64sa11
Driver’s side kick panel
Engine compartment 1 Spare fuses 2 Pull–out tool 64sa12 64sa10
Passenger’s side kick panel
Engine compartment 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 339 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 64sa16 64g008a
Trunk
Good 1. Turn the ignition switch off and open the fuse box lid. a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that you know is good. Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse.
Blown b. Install only a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid. 64sa14 2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull the suspected fuse straight out with the pull–out tool and check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips. 340 If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull out the ”CIG”, ”RADIO NO.1”, ”DOME” or ”HTR” fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating is the same. If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one lower than, but as close as possible to, the amperage. If the amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute to its original clips. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies. If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as soon as possible. CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE FUSES CAUTION Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire. 64sa19a
Engine compartment 64sa20a
Engine compartment 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 341 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS NOTICE Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer. 64g104
Good
Blown If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are blown, they must be replaced. If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged. CAUTION Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for replacement. Never install an ordinary wire – even for a temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire. 342 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ADDING WASHER FLUID CHECKING THE HEADLIGHT AIM 64sa01 64sa24c If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer fluid. You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.
1 Vertical movement adjusting bolt 1 (Inside screw) 2 Vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 (Outside screw) 3 Aiming caution label Before checking the headlight aim: 1. Make sure the body around the headlight is not deformed. 2. Park the vehicle on a level spot. 3. Get into the driver’s seat and put the vehicle in a state ready for driving (with a full tank). NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint. 4. Bounce the vehicle several times. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 343 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Adjusting the vertical aiming 64sa22b 64sa24d
1 For vertical movement adjusting bolt 1 (Inside screw) 2 For vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 (Outside screw) 344 1. Turn the Phillips–head screwdriver five turns or multiple–of–5 turns in either direction for turning the vertical movement adjusting bolt 1 (inside screw). At this time, keep the turning direction and number of turns in mind. Every 5 turns adjust an aiming position to up or down by about 0.2. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS INFORMATION  If 3 turns of the Phillips–head screwdriver are appropriate for the vertical movement adjusting bolt 1 (inside screw) at step 1, turn the Phillips–head screwdriver three fifth turns in the same direction as step 1 for the vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 (outside screw). 64sa23a  The turning confirmation mark is stamped at the tip of the vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 (outside screw). Turn the Phillips–head screwdriver for turning the vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 (outside screw) while checking this mark. 64sa25b 2. Turn the Phillips–head screwdriver one time for turning the vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 (outside screw) in the same way as step 1 in relation to the 5 turns of the Phillips–head screwdriver for turning the vertical movement adjusting bolt 1 (inside screw). 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 345 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS REPLACING LIGHT BULBS The illustrations on the following pages show the locations of light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table. CAUTION  To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs while they are hot.  Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and require special handling. They can burst or shatter if scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb with bare hands. Vehicles with discharge headlights:  Do not touch the high voltage socket when the headlight turns on. 20000 V is momentarily generated and may cause severe injury by electric shock.  Do not disassemble, repair or take apart the headlight bulbs, connector, power supply circuits and rotated components. Or you may be injured by electric shocks. Call your dealer when the headlights fail to work or have to be replaced or disposed of. NOTICE Only use a bulb of the listed type. 346 The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is caused by the temperature difference between the outside and inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogged up in the rain. However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your Lexus dealer. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS LIGHT LOCATION 64sa04c 64sa03 Light Bulbs Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type Bulb No. W Type 1 Rear side marker light 168 5 D 1 Headlight (High beam) 9005 60 A 2 Rear turn signal light 7440 21 D 2 Front turn signal light ––– 21 D 3 Tail/stop light 7443 5/21 D 3 Parking light 168 5 D 4 Back–up lights 7440 21 D 4 Front side marker light 168 5 D 5 License plate lights 194 3.8 D 5 Headlight (Low beam) ––– 35 B 6 Trunk lights 194 3.8 D 6 Fog light ––– 55 G 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 347 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 64sa05a Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Front interior/personal light ––– 8 F 2 Vanity light ––– 1.5 E 3 Glove box light ––– 1.2 D 4 Foot light ––– 1.4 D 5 Door courtesy light 194 3.8 D 1 A: B: C: D: E: F: G: 348 Type HB3 halogen bulbs D2S discharge bulbs HB4 halogen bulbs Wedge base bulbs Double end bulbs Single end bulbs H3 halogen bulbs ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 349 SECTION 6–5 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Body Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 351 352 353 355 BODY SPECIFICATIONS – DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT Overall length 4515 mm (177.8 in.) Overall width 1825 mm (71.9 in.) Overall height 1350 mm (53.1 in.)* Wheelbase 2620 mm (103.1 in.) Tread 1550 mm (61.0 in.) 1535 mm (60.4 in.) – Front – Rear Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) 295 kg (645 lb.) *: Unladen vehicle – FUEL TANK Capacity 75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.) 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 351 BODY PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long–term corrosion prevention. The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle are:
The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in hard–to–reach areas under the vehicle.
Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor accidents or by stones and gravel. The following conditions will cause or accelerate corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as soon as possible.
The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution.
High humidity, especially at temperatures just above freezing point.
Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an extended period of time, even though other parts of the vehicle are dry.
Components of the vehicle which do not dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation are exposed to high ambient temperature. 352 To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these guidelines: Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. In addition, observe the following points.
If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least once a month to minimize corrosion.
High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud and debris without removing. The lower edge of doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped water in these areas can cause corrosion.
Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over. See ”Washing and waxing” on page 353 for more tips. Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified body shop make the repair. BODY Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately clean and dry the area. Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be so damp and it will cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor. WASHING AND WAXING Washing your Lexus Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.
When driving in a coastal area
When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze
When having stuck of coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass of an insect
When driving in the areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust and chemical substances
When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and mud 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 353 BODY Hand–washing your Lexus Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not hot to the touch. 1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the underside of the vehicle or in the wheel wells. 2. Wash with a mild car–wash soap, mixed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub hard – let the soap and water remove the dirt. Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic substance splashes an ornament, be sure to wash it off with water and check if the ornament is damaged. CAUTION Do not attach the heavily damaged plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents while the vehicle is moving. Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent. Urethane bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side molding faces are soft. 65sa01 Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces. NOTICE Spray water on the side windows or top seals from above, at a 45 angle to the ground. NOTICE Do not spray water at side windows and top seals in a way which may cause water to enter the vehicle. 354 Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause damage. 3. Rinse thoroughly – dried soap can cause streaking. In hot weather you may need to rinse each section right after you wash it. 4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard – you might scratch the paint. BODY Automatic car wash 3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches. NOTICE CLEANING THE INTERIOR To prevent damage to the antenna, make sure it is retracted before driving your vehicle through an automatic car wash. CAUTION Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the paint can be scratched by some types of brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your vehicle. Waxing your Lexus
Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the floor. This may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle interior or exterior. Water may get into audio components or other electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion. Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the original beauty of your Lexus’ finish. Leather Interior Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel water well. The selected leather is used in your Lexus. Due to characteristics of leather products, some parts of leather may be rough, uneven or scratched originally. 1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax. 2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car–cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer ’s instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim as well as the paint. To keep good appearance, we recommend you to clean it periodically twice a year. Remove dirt on the leather in the following ways: 1. Wipe it off lightly using a soft cloth (e.g. gauze) dampened with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool. 2. Wring water from a clean cloth and thoroughly wipe off all traces of detergent with it. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 355 BODY 3. Wipe off the surface of the leather with a dry soft cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area. Excess of wet may cause the hardening or shrinking of the leather. NOTICE
Dirt or sand adhered to the leather may damage the treated surface and cause it to wear earlier. Remove dirt or sand using a vacuum cleaner.
If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an organic solvent.
Never use organic substances such as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could cause discoloring.
Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.
Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your upholstery always clean. 356
Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining. Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water – the best results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the shampoo instructions and follow them closely. The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water or with lukewarm water. Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. NOTICE
Use a good foam–type shampoo to clean the carpets.
Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.
Do not use dye or bleach on the belts – it may weaken them.
The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as these tend to stick to leather when warm.
The windows may be cleaned with any household window cleaner.
Do not use the belts until they become dry.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors. BODY Air Conditioning Control Panel, Car Audio, Instrument Panel, Console Panel, and Switches Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning. Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off any dirt. NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above.
If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean any spill using the method mentioned above.
The displays of air conditioning control panel and car audio are coated to avoid reflection. If the display becomes dirty, do not use chemicals and detergent. Wipe it off with a dry cloth. If you have any questions about the cleaning of your Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer them. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 357 SECTION 7 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 358 KEYS AND DOORS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll–free: 1–800–25–LEXUS). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll–free at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) 359 Seat Belt Warning WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU − PLEASE BUCKLE UP Lexus has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts. Lexus belts are:
Comfortable
Easy to use
Convenient We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) scu GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel selection: Select premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher for optimum engine performance. However, if such premium type cannot be obtained, you may temporarily use unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91).
Fuel tank capacity: 75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp. gal.)
Engine coolant: Capacity: 9.9 L (10.5 qt., 8.7 lmp. qt.) Coolant type – ”Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent With ethylene–glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.
Engine oil: “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil. Recommended oil viscosity – SAE 5W–30 if normal temperatures are below 38C (100F). Oil capacity: Drain and refill with filter 5.2 L (5.5 qt., 4.5 lmp. qt.) without filter 4.6 L (4.9 qt., 4.0 lmp. qt.) See page 308 for detailed information. For checking the engine coolant, see page 311. For changing the engine coolant, see the label on the coolant reservoir.
Automatic transmission: Fluid type – “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV” See page 316 for detailed information.
Tire information: See page 321 through 330 for detailed information.
Tire pressure: Tire size: 245/40ZR18 245/40ZR18 93Y Tire pressure: Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi) Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi) For sustained high speeds above 180 km/h (112 mph), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 80 kPa (0.8 kgf/cm2 or bar, 12 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire pressure molded on the tire sidewall. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) You should know as much about the quality and importance of proper maintenance of your new vehicle as the people who built it. The Lexus authorized Repair Manual tells you how to maintain your vehicle and enables you to correctly perform your own maintenance. The best way to keep your new vehicle in top running order is to maintain it properly from the moment you drive it off the showroom floor. Repair Manual Information The Lexus authorized Repair Manual is packed with literally everything you need to know to perform your own maintenance in virtually every area of your new vehicle. 2003 SC430 from May ’03 Prod. (OM24449U) cm–1 Maintenance procedures for the engine, chassis, body, electrical system, and more, are clearly explained and illustrated. Periodic maintenance and tune–up Periodic maintenance and tune–up helps to prevent small problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and clearly explains how to do the work yourself step–by–step. Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil and filter replacement. cm–2 Where to obtain the Repair Manual The repair manual for SC430 written in English, may be purchased as applicable from any Lexus dealer. Pub. Name: 2003 SC430 Repair Manual Pub. No.: Vol.1 RM962 U1 Vol.2 RM962 U2